0% found this document useful (0 votes)

26 views502 pages

BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide (14) (PDF) - EN

Uploaded by

myo htet htoo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

26 views502 pages

BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide (14) (PDF) - EN

Uploaded by

myo htet htoo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 502

BTS3900A (Ver.

Installation Guide

Issue 14
Date 2020-01-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2021. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide Contents

Contents

1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide.................................................................................. 1

1.1 Changes in BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide......................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Requirements for Site Selection....................................................................................................................................... 10
1.3 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11
1.3.1 Cabinet Configuration......................................................................................................................................................11
1.3.2 BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs........................12
1.3.3 BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured with RFUs and RRUs........................................ 19
1.3.4 Installation Clearance Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 27
1.3.5 Specifications of Customer Equipment in Huawei Cabinets.............................................................................. 29
1.4 Installation Preparations.................................................................................................................................................... 33
1.4.1 Documents........................................................................................................................................................................... 34
1.4.2 Tools and Instruments..................................................................................................................................................... 34
1.4.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel............................................................................................................................ 36
1.5 Unpacking Check.................................................................................................................................................................. 36
1.6 Obtaining an ESN................................................................................................................................................................. 38
1.7 Installation Process............................................................................................................................................................... 42
1.8 Checking the Installed Modules and Cables................................................................................................................43
1.8.1 Checking the BTS3900A Cabinets Supplied with AC Power............................................................................... 43
1.8.2 Checking the BTS3900A Cabinets Supplied with -48 V DC Power................................................................... 49
1.9 Installing a Base.................................................................................................................................................................... 55
1.10 Installing the Cabinet........................................................................................................................................................ 72
1.10.1 Installing Cabinets on a Base...................................................................................................................................... 72
1.10.2 Stacking Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................................................. 80
1.11 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable............................................................................................83
1.12 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables......................................................................................................... 86
1.12.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection Unit............................................................................ 86
1.12.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB and Its Cables............................................................................................................ 91
1.12.2.1 Installing an EMUA/EMUB....................................................................................................................................... 91
1.12.2.2 Installing an EMUA/EMUB in a TMC11H..........................................................................................................103
1.12.3 Installing the GPS Surge Protector......................................................................................................................... 111
1.12.4 Installing a GATM and a Bias-Tee........................................................................................................................... 116
1.12.5 Installing the DDF........................................................................................................................................................ 122
1.12.6 Installing Storage Batteries....................................................................................................................................... 126

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide Contents

1.12.6.1 Installing Lithium Batteries in a BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L........................................................................126

1.12.6.2 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T................................................................................132
1.12.6.3 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T................................................................................135
1.12.7 Installing a DCDU-12B................................................................................................................................................ 140
1.12.8 Installing PSUs and PDUs.......................................................................................................................................... 150
1.12.9 Installing a DCDU16D................................................................................................................................................. 153
1.12.10 Installing an EPU02D/EPU02D-02........................................................................................................................ 162
1.12.11 Installing an EPU02B/EPU02S................................................................................................................................ 174
1.12.12 Installing a BDU70-03/SDU60-02.........................................................................................................................185
1.12.13 Installing an EPU02S-02.......................................................................................................................................... 189
1.12.14 Installing the ODM06D............................................................................................................................................ 199
1.12.14.1 Installing the ODM06D on a Pole.....................................................................................................................199
1.12.14.2 Installing the ODM06D on a Mounting Frame............................................................................................ 201
1.12.14.3 Installing a PGND Cable for an ODM06D......................................................................................................210
1.12.15 Installing a BBU.......................................................................................................................................................... 212
1.12.15.1 Installing a BBU3900 or BBU3910.................................................................................................................... 212
1.12.15.2 Installing a BBU5900............................................................................................................................................. 221
1.12.15.3 Installing Boards in a BBU3910 and Surge Protection Boards................................................................ 230
1.12.16 Installing RFUs............................................................................................................................................................ 233
1.12.17 Installing RRUs............................................................................................................................................................ 239
1.12.18 Installing a PMU 15A in the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L................................................................................ 239
1.12.19 Installing the AC Heater.......................................................................................................................................... 245
1.12.20 Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS300D....................................................................................................... 249
1.12.21 Installing the eBat and WIUA................................................................................................................................ 252
1.13 Installing Cables............................................................................................................................................................... 256
1.13.1 Cabling Requirements................................................................................................................................................. 257
1.13.2 Cable Outlets................................................................................................................................................................. 265
1.13.3 Installing Power Cables.............................................................................................................................................. 271
1.13.3.1 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets........................................................................................................... 271
1.13.3.1.1 Installing Input Power Cables for an APM30H............................................................................................ 271
1.13.3.1.2 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to a TMC11H........................................................................276
1.13.3.1.3 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to an RFC............................................................................... 280
1.13.3.1.4 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L (APM:BBC = 1:1).........................283
1.13.3.1.5 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L Cabinets (APM:BBC = 1:2)...... 288
1.13.3.1.6 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/IBBS200T (APM:IBBS = 1:1)............ 294
1.13.3.1.7 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (APM:IBBS = 1:2)............... 300
1.13.3.1.8 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to an IBBS300D/IBBS300T (APM:IBBS = 1:1)............ 308
1.13.3.1.9 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts (APM:IBBS = 1:2)............... 314
1.13.3.1.10 (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables..................................................................................................... 321
1. Installing RRU Power Cables in a -48 V Scenario...................................................................................................... 322
2. Installing RRU Power Cables and ODM06D Power Cables.................................................................................... 337
3. Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 V Scenario...................................................................................................... 342

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide Contents

4. Installing Power Cables for High-Power RRUs (> 800 W)......................................................................................352

1.13.3.2 Installing Power Cables for DC Cabinets...........................................................................................................355
1.13.3.2.1 Installing Input Power Cables for an RFC......................................................................................................355
1.13.3.2.2 (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables....................................................................................................... 357
1. (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables in a -48 V Scenario................................................................................357
2. Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 V Scenario...................................................................................................... 373
3. Installing Power Cables for High-Power RRUs (> 800 W)......................................................................................383
1.13.4 Installing Transmission Cables................................................................................................................................. 386
1.13.4.1 Installing an E1/T1 Cable....................................................................................................................................... 386
1.13.4.2 Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables......................................................................................................................... 387
1.13.4.3 Installing FE/GE Optical Fibers............................................................................................................................. 390
1.13.5 Installing Signal Cables...............................................................................................................................................393
1.13.5.1 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios............................................... 393
1.13.5.1.1 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H ......................................................... 393
1.13.5.1.2 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L Expanded to 2 RFCs +1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 395
1.13.5.1.3 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2
BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H....................................................................................................................................................... 398
1.13.5.1.4 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 402
1.13.5.1.5 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2
BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H....................................................................................................................................................... 406
1.13.5.1.6 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts ............................................................................................................................................................. 411
1.13.5.1.7 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts ............................................................................................................................................................. 414
1.13.5.1.8 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H .......... 417
1.13.5.1.9 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H .............................................................................................................. 420
1.13.5.1.10 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H .............................................................................................................. 424
1.13.5.1.11 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts...............................................................................................................................................................428
1.13.5.1.12 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts...............................................................................................................................................................432
1.13.5.1.13 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H .............................................................................................................. 436
1.13.5.1.14 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H .............................................................................................................. 441
1.13.5.2 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios................................... 446
1.13.5.2.1 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H........................................................... 446
1.13.5.2.2 Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs Expanded to 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs....................................................... 448
1.13.5.2.3 Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs....................................................................................................................... 451
1.13.5.3 (Optional) Installing BBU Interconnection Signal Cables........................................................................... 453
1.13.5.4 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable................................................................................................................................461

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide Contents

1.13.6 Installing RF jumpers................................................................................................................................................... 462

1.13.7 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................ 466
1.13.8 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables.................................................................................................... 468
1.14 Installation Checklist....................................................................................................................................................... 473
1.15 Powering On a Base Station........................................................................................................................................ 476
1.16 Follow-up Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 488
1.16.1 Sealing Cable Outlets.................................................................................................................................................. 488
1.16.2 Repainting....................................................................................................................................................................... 493
1.16.3 (Optional) Pairing the eBat and WIUA................................................................................................................. 495

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Overview
This document describes the procedure for installing the cabinets, boards,
modules, and cables in the BTS3900A (Ver.E) (shortened to BTS3900A in this
document). It also provides checklists for hardware installation.
The RF modules for distributed base stations in this document include RRUs and
AAUs. The application scenarios, power distribution principles, cable connections,
and cable installation of the RRUs and AAUs are the same. The following uses the
RRUs as an example.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Solution Version Product Version

3900 series base SRAN9.0 and later V100R009C00 and later

stations

Unless otherwise specified, cabinets, components, and RATs involved in this

document are supported in V100R008C00 and later versions. The following table
lists the special cases.
Item Solution Version Product Version

IBC10 SRAN8.1/GBSS15.1/ V100R008C01 and later

RAN15.1/eRAN6.1 and
later

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Item Solution Version Product Version

● BBU3910 SRAN9.0/GBSS16.0/ V100R009C00 and later

● APM30H (Ver.E) RAN16.0/eRAN7.0/eRAN
TDD 7.0 and later
● TMC11H (Ver.E)
● RFC (Ver.E)
● IBBS200D (Ver.E)
● IBBS200T (Ver.E)

● BBU3910A SRAN10.0/GBSS17.0/ V100R010C00 and later

● OPM50M RAN17.0/eRAN8.0 and
later
● OPM15M
● IBBS20D
● IBBS300D (Ver.A)
● IBBS300T (Ver.A)
● USU3910

IBBS20L SRAN11.0/GBSS18.0/ V100R011C00 and later

RAN18.0/eRAN11.0/
eRAN TDD 11.0 and later

● IBBS20L-E SRAN11.1/GBSS18.1/ V100R011C10 and later

● OPM30M RAN18.1/eRAN11.1/
eRAN TDD 11.1 and later

RMU3900A SRAN12.0/GBSS19.0/ V100R012C00 and later

RAN19.0/eRAN12.0/
eRAN TDD 12.0 and later

● EPU02D SRAN12.1/GBSS19.1/ V100R012C10 and later

● EPU02D-02 RAN19.1/eRAN12.1/
eRAN TDD 12.1 and later
● MRE1000

● BTS3900 (Ver.E_A~D) SRAN12.1/GBSS19.1/ V100R012C10 and later

● BTS3900L (Ver.E_B~D) RAN19.1/eRAN12.1/
eRAN TDD 12.1 and later
● IMB05
● ILC29 (Ver.E)

● BTS5900 (Ver.A) SRAN12.1/GBSS19.1/ V100R012C10 and later

● BTS5900L (Ver.A) RAN19.1/eRAN12.1/
eRAN TDD 12.1 and later

● APM5930 SRAN12.1/GBSS19.1/ V100R012C10 and later

● BBC5200D/BBC5200T/ RAN19.1/eRAN12.1/
BBC5300D/BBC5300T eRAN TDD 12.1 and later
● IBC10 (Ver.B)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Item Solution Version Product Version

● BBC5200D-L SRAN15.1/GBSS21.1/ V100R015C10 and later

● DCDU16D RAN21.1/eRAN15.1/
eRAN TDD 15.1 and later
● FAN02H
● BBU5900A
● OPM200
● IBBS50L
● RFC5906

● INS05 SRAN16.0/GBSS22.0/ V100R016C00 and later

● IFS5906 RAN22.0/eRAN16.0/
eRAN TDD 16.0 and later
● IMS5906
● EPU02S

● EPU02B SRAN16.1/GBSS22.1/ V100R016C10 and later

● EPU02S-02 RAN22.1/eRAN16.1/
eRAN TDD 16.1 and later

DCDU16D-02 SRAN17.0/GBSS23.0/ V100R017C00 and later

RAN23.0/eRAN17.0/
eRAN TDD 17.0 and later

BBC5200T-L SRAN15.1/GBSS21.1/ V100R015C10 and later

RAN21.1/eRAN15.1/
eRAN TDD 15.1 and later

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

● Base station installation engineers

Organization
1.1 Changes in BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide
This section describes the changes in BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide.
1.2 Requirements for Site Selection
Sites provided by Huawei must be deployed in places that meet specified
requirements.
1.4 Installation Preparations
This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the
installation. It also specifies the skills that the onsite personnel must have.
1.5 Unpacking Check
This chapter describes how to unpack the delivered equipment, components, or
parts and check whether all the materials are included and intact.
1.6 Obtaining an ESN

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

The electronic serial number (ESN) is used to identify an NE. Record the ESN of
the base station before the installation for future commissioning.
1.7 Installation Process
The process of installing the BTS3900A and BTS5900A consists of the following
procedures: installing the bases, installing the cabinets, installing optional
modules, installing cables, performing the installation check, powering on the
base station, and performing subsequent operations.
1.9 Installing a Base
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a base for a
cabinet.
1.11 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential Cable
A PGND cable connects a PGND screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure
proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on
different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
1.14 Installation Checklist
This section describes how to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cables after the installation is complete.
1.15 Powering On a Base Station
This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the
power supply to the components in a cabinet.
1.16 Follow-up Procedure
This section describes the operations that need to be performed after the
installation, which include sealing the cable outlets on the base of the cabinet and
repainting the cabinet.

1.1 Changes in BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

This section describes the changes in BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide.

14 (2020-01-20)
This is the fourteenth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 13 (2019-12-27), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with Issue 13 (2019-12-27), this issue includes the following changes.
Topic Change Description

● 1.12.13 Installing an EPU02S-02 Added the descriptions of EPU02B and

● 1.12.11 Installing an EPU02B/ EPU02S-02.
EPU02S
● 1.12.12 Installing a BDU70-03/
SDU60-02
● Installing RRU Power Cables in a
-57 V Scenario
● 1.15 Powering On a Base Station

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Compared with Issue 13 (2019-12-27), this issue does not exclude any topics.

13 (2019-12-27)
This is the thirteenth commercial release.

Compared with Issue 12 (2019-10-28), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with Issue 12 (2019-10-28), this issue includes the following changes.

Topic Change Description

● 1.12.11 Installing an EPU02B/ Added the EPU02S description.

EPU02S
● 1.12.12 Installing a BDU70-03/
SDU60-02
● Installing RRU Power Cables in a
-57 V Scenario
● 1.15 Powering On a Base Station

Compared with Issue 12 (2019-10-28), this issue does not exclude any topics.

12 (2019-10-28)
This is the twelfth commercial release.

Compared with Issue 11 (2019-07-20), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with Issue 11 (2019-07-20), this issue includes the following changes.

Topic Change Description

● 1.8 Checking the Installed Added the FAN02H description.

Modules and Cables
● 1.13.5.1 Installing Monitoring
Signal Cables Between Cabinets
in AC Scenarios

Compared with Issue 11 (2019-07-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.

11 (2019-07-20)
This is the eleventh commercial release.

Compared with Issue 10 (2019-03-25), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with Issue 10 (2019-03-25), this issue includes the following changes.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Topic Change Description

● 1.12.9 Installing a DCDU16D Added the DCDU16D description.

● Installing RRU Power Cables in a
-48 V Scenario
● 1.15 Powering On a Base Station

Compared with Issue 10 (2019-03-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

10 (2019-03-25)
This is the tenth commercial release.

Compared with Issue 09 (2018-12-30), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with Issue 09 (2018-12-30), this issue includes the following changes.

Topic Change Description

Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 Deleted the method of installing RRU
V Scenario power cables when an EPU02B,
EPU02S, BDU70-03, or SDU60-02 is
installed.

Compared with Issue 09 (2018-12-30), this issue excludes the following topic:
Installing an EPU02B/EPU02S.

09 (2018-12-30)
This is the ninth commercial release.

Compared with Issue 08 (2017-05-30), this issue does not include any changes or
exclude any topics.

Compared with Issue 08 (2017-05-30), this issue includes the following new topics:

● Installing an EPU02B/EPU02S
● Installing a BDU70-03/SDU60-02
● Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 V Scenario
● 1.12.6.1 Installing Lithium Batteries in a BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L
● 1.12.18 Installing a PMU 15A in the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L
● 1.13.3.1.4 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L
(APM:BBC = 1:1)
● 1.13.3.1.5 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L
Cabinets (APM:BBC = 1:2)
● 1.13.5.1.2 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L Expanded to 2
RFCs +1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● 1.13.5.1.3 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1 TMC11H

Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H
● 1.13.5.1.4 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls Expanded to 2
RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls
● 1.13.5.1.5 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H
Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H

08 (2017-05-30)
This is the eighth commercial release.

Compared with Issue 07 (2017-04-20), this issue does not include any changes or
exclude any topics.

Compared with Issue 07 (2017-04-20), this issue includes the following new
information.

Topic Change Description

1.12.10 Installing an EPU02D/ Added the procedure for installing the

EPU02D-02 EPU02D-02.

Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57

V Scenario

07 (2017-04-20)
This is the seventh commercial release.

Compared with Issue 06 (2016-12-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Compared with Issue 06 (2016-12-31), this issue includes the following new
information.

Topic Change Description

1.13.3.1.10 (Optional) Installing RRU Added the procedure for installing RRU
Power Cables power cables in a –57 V scenario.

Added the procedure for installing RRU

power cables when the RRU power is
greater than 800 W.

Compared with Issue 06 (2016-12-31), this issue includes the following changes.

Topic Change Description

1.12.10 Installing an EPU02D/ Modified the EPU02D configuration

EPU02D-02 scenario.

1.2 Requirements for Site Selection Added the requirements for site
selection.

Compared with Issue 02 (2015-12-30), this issue includes the following changes.

Topic Change Description

1.5 Unpacking Check Added the requirements for product

transportation.

02 (2015-12-30)
This is the second commercial release.

Compared with Issue 01 (2015-09-30), this issue does not include any new topics
or exclude any topics.

Compared with Issue 01 (2015-09-30), this issue includes the following changes.

Topic Change Description

1.13.8 (Optional) Installing CPRI Added the method of installing single-

Fiber Optic Cables fiber bidirectional optical fibers.

01 (2015-09-30)
This is the first commercial release.

Compared with Draft A (2015-07-30), this issue does not include any new topics
or exclude any topics.

Compared with Draft A (2015-07-30), this issue includes the following changes.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Topic Change Description

● 1.12.2.1 Installing an EMUA/ Changed the connector of the EMUA/

EMUB EMUB power cable on the EMUA/
● 1.12.2.2 Installing an EMUA/ EMUB side to a 2-pin connector.
EMUB in a TMC11H

Draft A (2015-07-30)
This is a draft.

1.2 Requirements for Site Selection

Sites provided by Huawei must be deployed in places that meet specified
requirements.

Requirements for Outdoor Base Stations

● Sites must be free from dust, excessive heat, harmful gases, and explosive
substances. The power voltage at the site must be stable.
● Sites must be located at a place where violent shakes or strong noises are
unlikely to occur.
● Sites must be far away from substations, industrial boilers, and heating
boilers.
● Sites must be far away from high-power radio transmitters, radar stations, or
other interference sources. The interference field strength cannot exceed the
shielding specifications of the base station for useless radiation.
● Sites must be far away from pollution sources. If a site has to be constructed
near a pollution source, the site must be constructed in the upwind direction.
– Sites must be located at least 5 km (3.11 mi.) away from heavy pollution
sources, such as a smelting plant or a coal mine.
– Sites must be located at least 3.7 km (2.30 mi.) away from medium
pollution sources such as a chemical plant, a rubber plant, or an
electroplating plant.
– Sites must be located at least 2 km (1.24 mi.) away from light pollution
sources such as a food product factory or a leather product factory.
● Air intake vents of the communication equipment must be located far away
from the outlets of sewer pipes, septic tanks, or sewage disposal pools. Ensure
that the equipment is in positive pressure state and is free from corrosive
gases. Otherwise, electronic components and circuit boards may be corroded.

Requirements for Indoor Base Stations

● Equipment rooms for indoor base stations cannot be constructed in livestock
rooms or fertilizer warehouses. If an equipment room has to be located near a
livestock house or a fertilizer warehouse, it must be located in the upwind
direction.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● It is recommended that the equipment room of an indoor site be located in a

floor higher than the second. If this requirement cannot be met, the ground
height of the equipment room must be 600 mm (23.62 in.) higher than the
maximum flood level in the local history.
● The following recommendations are provided to optimize equipment rooms
that are sensitive to noise:
– Equipment is installed as far as possible from human activity areas.
– Equipment rooms are not located adjacent to bedrooms of residents. If an
equipment room has to be adjacent to bedrooms of residents, the
equipment room and the bedrooms should be separated by at least two
walls.
– Equipment is installed 5 m (16.4 ft) farther from doors and windows.
– The front doors of equipment are facing towards a direction that people
rarely pass by.
– The thickness of the floor in the equipment room is greater than or equal
to 150 mm (5.91 in.).
– Rubber pads are placed under equipment to reduce noise and solid-borne
sound.
– It is recommended that sound-absorbing materials be stuck to
appropriate positions on walls in the equipment room to reduce noise.

1.3 Overview
Before installing a cabinet, you need to know the configurations, installation
scenarios, and clearance requirements of the cabinet.

1.3.1 Cabinet Configuration

A BTS3900A or a BTS5900A is an outdoor separated macro base station, which
consists of cabinets that have different functions.

The following table lists cabinets applicable to the BTS3900A and BTS5900A as
well as the cabinet configuration for reference.

Table 1-1 APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS, and RFC series cabinets

Cabinet Type Cabinet Name Cabinet Configuration

APM30H ● APM30H (Ver.B) See Components in APM30Hs.

series cabinets ● APM30H (Ver.C)
● APM30H (Ver.D)
● APM30H (Ver.E)

TMC11H series ● TMC11H (Ver.B) See Components in TMC11Hs.

cabinets ● TMC11H (Ver.C)
● TMC11H (Ver.D)
● TMC11H (Ver.E)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Cabinet Name Cabinet Configuration

IBBS series ● IBBS200D (Ver.B) See Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)

cabinets or IBBS200T or Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E).
(Ver.B)
● IBBS200D (Ver.C)
or IBBS200T
(Ver.C)
● IBBS200D (Ver.D)
or IBBS200T
(Ver.D)
● IBBS200D (Ver.E)
or IBBS200T
(Ver.E)
● IBBS300D (Ver.A)
or IBBS300T
(Ver.A)

RFC series ● RFC (Ver.B) See Components in RFCs.

cabinets ● RFC (Ver.C)
● RFC (Ver.D)
● RFC (Ver.E)

1.3.2 BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured

with RFUs but Without RRUs
When a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, different cabinet
configurations can be used for the BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or
-48 V DC power in single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode scenarios.

Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E)

Maximum configuration principles for a single site
● A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.
● Cabinets in a site must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm
(1.57 in.) between them.
● When a site is configured with more than six RFUs and only one IBBS200D,
IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T, the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or
IBBS300T must be configured with at least two battery packs consisting of
100 Ah storage batteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery pack during
discharging.
Principles for stacking and combining cabinets
● When an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L is stacked with a
TMC11H, the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L must be placed
under the TMC11H. When two IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L
cabinets are stacked, only cabinets of the same type can be stacked. That is,
an IBBS200D can only be stacked with another IBBS200D. An IBBS200T can

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

only be stacked with another IBBS200T. A BBC5200D-L can only be stacked

with another BBC5200D-L. A BBC5200T-L can only be stacked with another
BBC5200T-L.
● When an IBBS300D/IBBS300T is stacked with a TMC11H, the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T must be placed under the TMC11H. When two IBBS300D/IBBS300T
cabinets are stacked, only cabinets of the same type can be stacked. That is,
an IBBS300D can only be stacked with another IBBS300D. An IBBS300T can
only be stacked with another IBBS300T.
● An IBBS200D or IBBS200T cannot be used together with an IBBS300D or
IBBS300T.
● An RFC can be stacked only with an APM30H or TMC11H, and the RFC must
be placed under the APM30H or TMC11H.
● If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L or transmission cabinet
TMC11H, are required during initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinets are
positioned on the left, and the basic cabinets are positioned on the right. If
both a battery cabinet and a transmission cabinet are required, the battery
cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the
transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the
left side of the battery cabinet.
● During initial site deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion.
Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right side of original
cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In
a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original
cabinets.
Configuration principles in single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base
stations
● In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple-
or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs can be configured, and the second
BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the first BBU.
● A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one
BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum
of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed
1200 W.
● If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are
installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
● During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H,
the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second
BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
NOTE

The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station

configured with one BBU are the same as those in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station
configured with two BBUs. This section describes the cabinet configurations in a base
station configured with two BBUs.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Configuration Principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E)

NOTE

Cabinet configuration principles for a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E) are the same as those for a
base station (Ver.E+Ver.E). For details, see Cabinet Configuration Principles for a
BTS3900A (Ver.E).

Restrictions on the cabinet configurations in a base station (Ver.D+Ver.E)

● If a Ver.E cabinet is installed on a Ver.D base, the cabling capability at the
bottom of the Ver.E cabinet is the same as that of a Ver.D cabinet.
● If an APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to a Ver.D series battery cabinet, the
power distribution capability of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an
APM30H (Ver.D).
● If an APM30H (Ver.E) is stacked on an RFC (Ver.D), the cabling capability at
the bottom of the APM30H (Ver.E) is the same as that of an APM30H (Ver.D).
● If an APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to a Ver.E battery cabinet, the power
backup and monitoring capabilities of the Ver.E battery cabinet are the same
as those of a Ver.D battery cabinet.
● If an APM30H (Ver.D) is stacked on an RFC (Ver.E), the cabling capability at
the bottom of the RFC (Ver.E) is the same as that of an RFC (Ver.D).

Cabinet Configurations
● The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with
different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but
without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario.

Figure 1-1 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the initial
configuration of 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the initial configuration of 1
APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.
● The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with
backup power provided by one battery cabinet as well as different space for
customer equipment and carrier configurations.

Figure 1-2 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power

provided by one battery cabinet

● The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with
backup power provided by two battery cabinets as well as different space for
customer equipment and carrier configurations.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-3 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power

provided by two battery cabinets

● The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station

supplied with -48 V DC power.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-4 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC

power

The following table lists the cabinet configurations in the case of different power
inputs, backup power requirements, spaces for customer equipment, and carrier
configurations.

Table 1-2 Cabinet configurations

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration
Supply Power Customer Configurat
Requirem Equipmen ion
ent t

110 V AC No backup Single ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC

or 220 V power BBU: ≤ 5 U
AC Two BBUs:
≤3U

Single ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs

BBU: ≤ 5 U
Two BBUs:
≤3U

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power Customer Configurat
Requirem Equipmen ion
ent t

Single ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1

BBU: ≤ 16 TMC11H
U
Two BBUs:
≤ 14 U

Single ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1

BBU: ≤ 16 TMC11H
U
Two BBUs:
≤ 14 U

Backup Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1

power BBU: ≤ 5 U IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
provided Two BBUs: BBC5200D-L
by one ≤3U ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
battery IBBS300D/IBBS300T
cabinet
Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
BBU: ≤ 5 U IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
Two BBUs: BBC5200D-L
≤3U ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1

BBU: ≤ 16 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
U BBC5200D-L+1
Two BBUs: TMC11H
≤ 14 U ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1
TMC11H

Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1

BBU: ≤ 16 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
U BBC5200D-L+1
Two BBUs: TMC11H
≤ 14 U ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1
TMC11H

Backup Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2

power BBU: ≤ 5 U IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
provided Two BBUs: BBC5200D-Ls
by two ≤3U ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
battery IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
cabinets

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power Customer Configurat
Requirem Equipmen ion
ent t

Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2

BBU: ≤ 5 U IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
Two BBUs: BBC5200D-Ls
≤3U ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2

BBU: ≤ 16 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
U BBC5200D-Ls+1
Two BBUs: TMC11H
≤ 14 U ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
+1 TMC11H

Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2

BBU: ≤ 16 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
U BBC5200D-Ls+1
Two BBUs: TMC11H
≤ 14 U ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
+1 TMC11H

-48 V DC - Single ≤ 6 RFUs 1 TMC11H+1 RFC

BBU: ≤ 9 U
≤ 12 RFUs 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs
Two BBUs:
≤7U

Single ≤ 6 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

BBU: ≤ 20
U ≤ 12 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs
Two BBUs:
≤ 18 U

1.3.3 BTS3900A (Ver.E) or BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E) Configured

with RFUs and RRUs
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different cabinet configurations can be used
for single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode BTS3900A base stations supplied
with 110 V AC/220 V AC power and -48 V DC power.

Cabinet Configuration Principles

Maximum configuration principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.E)
● A single BTS3900A supports a maximum of 6 RFUs and 15 RRUs or 12 RFUs
and 9 RRUs.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRU specifications

supported by the BTS3900A are listed in the following table.

Table 1-3 RRU specifications supported by a BTS3900A configured with RFUs and
RRUs
RF Module Configuration RRU Specifications

6 RFUs+15 RRUs 6 RRUs (2x80 W power per RRU)+9

RRUs (2x40 W power per RRU)

12 RFUs+9 RRUs 9 RRUs (2x40 W power per RRU)

Maximum configuration principles for a BTS3900A (Ver.D+Ver.E)

● If a Ver.D cabinet and a Ver.E cabinet are installed side by side or stacked in a
base station, the base station supports a maximum of six RFUs and nine
RRUs.
● A maximum of six 2x60 W RRUs and three 2x40 W RRUs can be configured.
Configuration principles in single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base
stations
● In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple-
or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs can be configured, and the second
BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the first BBU.
● A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one
BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum
of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed
1200 W.
● If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are
installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
● During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H,
the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second
BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
NOTE

The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station

Cabinet Configuration
● The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with
different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but
without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-5 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power

● The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with
backup power provided by one battery cabinet as well as different space for
customer equipment and carrier configurations.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-6 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power

provided by one battery cabinet

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-7 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power

provided by two battery cabinets

● The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station

supplied with -48 V DC power.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-8 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC

power

The following table lists the cabinet configurations in the case of different power
inputs, backup power requirements, spaces for customer equipment, and carrier
configurations.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-4 Cabinet configurations

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration
Supply Power Customer Configurat
Requirem Equipmen ion
ent t

110 V AC No backup Single ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC

or 220 V power BBU: ≤ 5 U +15 RRUs
AC Two BBUs:
≤3U

Single ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs

BBU: ≤ 5 U +9 RRUs
Two BBUs:
≤3U

Single ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1

BBU: ≤ 16 +15 RRUs TMC11H
U
Two BBUs:
≤ 14 U

Single ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1

BBU: ≤ 16 +9 RRUs TMC11H
U
Two BBUs:
≤ 14 U

Backup Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1

power BBU: ≤ 5 U +15 RRUs IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
provided Two BBUs: BBC5200D-L/
by one ≤3U BBC5200T-L
battery ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
cabinet IBBS300D/IBBS300T/
BBC5200T-L

Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1

BBU: ≤ 5 U +9 RRUs IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
Two BBUs: BBC5200D-L/
≤3U BBC5200T-L
● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS300D/IBBS300T/
BBC5200T-L

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power Customer Configurat
Requirem Equipmen ion
ent t

Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1

BBU: ≤ 16 +15 RRUs IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
U BBC5200D-L/
Two BBUs: BBC5200T-L+1
≤ 14 U TMC11H
● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS300D/IBBS300T/
BBC5200T-L+1
TMC11H

Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1

BBU: ≤ 16 +9 RRUs IBBS200D/IBBS200T/
U BBC5200D-L/
Two BBUs: BBC5200T-L+1
≤ 14 U TMC11H
● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS300D/IBBS300T/
BBC5200T-L+1
TMC11H

Backup Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2

power BBU: ≤ 5 U +15 RRUs IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
provided Two BBUs: BBC5200D-Ls/
by two ≤3U BBC5200T-Ls
battery ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
cabinets IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls

Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFC+2

BBU: ≤ 5 U +9 RRUs IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
Two BBUs: BBC5200D-Ls/
≤3U BBC5200T-Ls
● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls

Single ≤ 6 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2

BBU: ≤ 16 +15 RRUs IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
U BBC5200D-Ls/
Two BBUs: BBC5200T-Ls+1
≤ 14 U TMC11H
● 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls+1
TMC11H

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Power Backup Space for Carrier Cabinet Configuration

Supply Power Customer Configurat
Requirem Equipmen ion
ent t

Single ≤ 12 RFUs ● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2

BBU: ≤ 16 +9 RRUs IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/
U BBC5200D-Ls/
Two BBUs: BBC5200T-Ls+1
≤ 14 U TMC11H
● 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts/
BBC5200T-Ls+1
TMC11H

-48 V DC - Single ≤ 6 RFUs 1 TMC11H+1 RFC

BBU: ≤ 8 U +15 RRUs
Two BBUs:
≤6U

Single ≤ 12 RFUs 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

BBU: ≤ 9 U +9 RRUs
Two BBUs:
≤7U

Single ≤ 6 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

BBU: ≤ 19 +15 RRUs
U
Two BBUs:
≤ 17 U

Single ≤ 12 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

BBU: ≤ 20 +9 RRUs
U
Two BBUs:
≤ 18 U

1.3.4 Installation Clearance Requirements

The installation of the BTS3900A or the BTS5900A is classified into three scenarios:
a single cabinet is installed alone, two cabinets are installed side by side, and two
cabinets are stacked.
When two cabinets are installed side by side, the clearance between them must
range from 40 mm to 150 mm (1.58 in. to 5.91 in.). If a noise reduction module
(NRM) is required, the minimum clearance between two cabinets is 300 mm
(11.81 in.).
The following figure shows the clearance requirements for the APM30H, TMC11H,
RFC, and IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

The three cabinets in the following figure may be an RFC, a TMC11H, or an IBBS200D. The
installation clearances for an IBBS200T are the same as the installation clearances shown in the
following figure, but its top view is different from any of the three cabinets in the following
figure. Therefore, it is omitted here.

Figure 1-9 Clearance requirements for the cabinets (top view 1)

The following figure shows the installation clearances for the APM30H, TMC11H,
RFC, and IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Figure 1-10 Clearance requirements for the cabinets (top view 2)

The following figure shows the clearance requirements for the APM30H, TMC11H,
and RFC.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-11 Clearance requirements for the cabinets (top view 3)

1.3.5 Specifications of Customer Equipment in Huawei

Cabinets
Customer equipment in Huawei cabinets must meet certain specifications.

The following conditions must be met when the customer equipment is installed
in any of the following cabinets: APM5930, APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.E), APM30H (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D_A2),
APM30 (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H
(Ver.E), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), TMC (Ver.D_A1), MRE1000,
BTS3900AL (Ver.A), and BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z).
● Dimension Requirements
Figure 1-12 shows the dimension requirements.
– The width is 19 inches.
– The depth of the customer equipment that uses natural ventilation or
supports heat dissipation from the left and right sides is less than or
equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.). The depth of the customer equipment that
supports heat dissipation from the front and rear ends is less than or
equal to 250 mm (9.84 in.).
– The cabling space in front of the panel is less than or equal to 80 mm
(3.15 in.) in the MRE1000 and less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.) in
other types of cabinets.
● Heat Dissipation Requirements
– Requirements for the air duct in an MRE1000

▪ Customer equipment must be vertically placed in the cabinet. If the

customer equipment has built-in fans, there must be a bottom-to-
top or front-to-rear air duct.

▪ If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses
natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved on left
and right sides of the installed customer equipment to ensure heat
dissipation.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

– Requirements for the air duct in other cabinets

▪ If the customer equipment has built-in fans, there must be a left-to-

right or front-to-rear air duct.

▪ If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses
natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above
and below the installed customer equipment to ensure heat
dissipation.

Figure 1-12 Dimensions and heat dissipation requirements for customer

equipment

● Temperature Requirements
Temperature requirements for customer equipment are different in common
areas and high-temperature areas.
NOTE

Common areas and high-temperature areas are differentiated as follows:

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

customer equipment. For example, in common areas, if t1 ≤ -10°C (14°F) and

t2 ≥ 55°C (131°F), the customer equipment meets requirements; if t1 > -10°C
(14°F) and t2 < 55°C (131°F), the customer equipment does not meet the
requirements.

Figure 1-13 Temperature requirements for the customer equipment

Primary Installation Tools

The primary installation tools must be provided for onsite installation, such as
tools for measuring dimensions, preparing cables, and fastening, as listed in Table
1-5.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-5 Primary Installation Tools

Multi-purpose wire Torque screwdriver (0.4 Torque wrench (1 N·m to
stripper (for stripping N·m to 15 N·m or 3.54 50 N·m or 8.85 lbf·in. to
wires, cutting wires, and lbf·in. to 132.76 lbf·in.) 442.54 lbf·in.)
crimping OT terminals)

Size: 10 mm (0.39 in.),

13 mm (0.51 in.), 14 mm
3 mm (0.12 in.) and 5 (0.55 in.), 16 mm (0.63
mm (0.20 in.) in.), 17 mm (0.67 in.), 18
mm (0.71 in.), 19 mm
(0.75 in.), 21 mm (0.83
3 mm (0.12 in.) and 5 in.), 22 mm (0.87 in.),
mm (0.20 in.) and 32 mm (1.26 in.)

M2.5 to M6

Heat gun Measuring tape Torque socket (1.2 N·m

to 45 N·m or 10.62 lbf·in.
to 398.28 lbf·in.)

Size: 10 mm (0.39 in.),

13 mm (0.51 in.), 14 mm
(0.55 in.), 16 mm (0.63
in.), 17 mm (0.67 in.), 18
mm (0.71 in.), 19 mm
(0.75 in.), 21 mm (0.83
in.), 22 mm (0.87 in.),
and 32 mm (1.26 in.)

Level Hammer drill (Φ12, Φ14, Hex key

Φ16, and Φ18)

Auxiliary Installation Tools

The auxiliary installation tools provide protection or facilitate the installation, as
listed in Table 1-6.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-6 Auxiliary installation tools

Protective gloves ESD gloves Utility knife

Diagonal pliers Multimeter Vacuum cleaner

Marker (diameter ≤ 10 Rubber mallet -

mm or 0.39 in.)

1.4.3 Requirements for Onsite Personnel

Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation,
onsite personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety
precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following:
● The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be
familiar with the proper installation and operation methods.
● The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and
installation environment. In most cases, three to five people are required.

1.5 Unpacking Check

This chapter describes how to unpack the delivered equipment, components, or
parts and check whether all the materials are included and intact.

Context
When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts,
you must:
● Package them for delivery before the base station deployment. Unpacked
delivery or package replacement for transferring is not allowed.
● Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.
● Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts
with bare hands, sweat-soaked gloves, or dirty gloves.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● Transport the base stations in an environment that meets requirements of

ETSI 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3. For the goods damage caused by non-standard
and violent transportation or non-human factors (such as natural disasters),
the transportation entity should take the responsibility.

NOTICE

● The gravity center of some cabinets is in the front, for example, the IBBS700T,
BTS3900AL, and IBBS300T. Therefore, avoid toppling of the cabinet when the
door of the cabinet is open, especially when you unpack the cabinet or before it
has been secured onto a base.
● After unpacking a cabinet or BBU, you must power on the cabinet or BBU
within seven days. Otherwise, the cabinet or BBU may be damaged.
● After unpacking an RRU, you must power on the RRU within 24 hours.
Otherwise, the RRU may be damaged.
● To protect the equipment from damage, you are advised to keep the unpacked
equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the storage
environment, packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or
eroded equipment, and then file the photos.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.

If... Then...

The total number is consistent with Go to Step 2.

the packing list

The total number is not consistent Find out the cause and report it to the
with the packing list local Huawei office.

Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.

If... Then...

The outer packing case is intact Go to Step 3.

The outer packing is severely Find out the cause and report it to the
damaged or soaked local Huawei office.

Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the
packing list.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

If... Then...

The type and quantity are consistent Sign the Packing List with the customer.
with the packing list on each
packing case

There is any shortage, wrong Report the situation to the local Huawei
delivery, or damaged equipment office.

----End

1.6 Obtaining an ESN

The electronic serial number (ESN) is used to identify an NE. Record the ESN of
the base station before the installation for future commissioning.

Procedure
● Obtain the ESN on the BBU5900.
a. Record the ESN on the BBU5900. If there is a label on the FAN unit of the
BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting ear of the BBU, as
shown in Figure 1-16. Remove the label and record the base station
information on the label marked Site.
NOTE

The base station information includes the name, ID, and location of the base station.

Figure 1-16 ESN position

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.
NOTE

For a base station configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs
and submit them to the personnel responsible for the base station
commissioning.
● Obtain the ESN on the BBU5900A.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

a. Record the ESN on the BBU5900A. The following figure shows the
position of the ESN on the module.

Figure 1-17 ESN position

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.
NOTE

For a base station configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs
and submit them to the personnel responsible for the base station
commissioning.
● Obtain the ESN on the BBU3900/BBU3910.
a. Record the ESN on the BBU.

▪ If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on
a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 1-18. Record the ESN
and base station information manually.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

▪ If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on
the label and a mounting ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 1-19.
Remove the label and record the base station information on the
label marked Site.
NOTE

The base station information includes the name, ID, and location of the base station.

Figure 1-18 ESN position (1)

Figure 1-19 ESN position (2)

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.
NOTE

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-20 ESN position

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.
NOTE

Before removing the backup ESN label, take a photo of it.

Figure 1-21 Removing the backup ESN label of the BBU3910C

b. Report the ESN and base station information to the commissioning

personnel, or remove the label and submit it to the commissioning
personnel.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

For a base station configured with multiple BBUs, record the ESNs on all BBUs
and submit them to the personnel responsible for the base station
commissioning.

----End

1.7 Installation Process

The process of installing the BTS3900A and BTS5900A consists of the following
procedures: installing the bases, installing the cabinets, installing optional
modules, installing cables, performing the installation check, powering on the
base station, and performing subsequent operations.

The following figure shows the installation process.

Figure 1-22 Installation process

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1.8 Checking the Installed Modules and Cables

After installing modules and cables in the cabinet, you need to check that the
modules and cables are installed securely.

1.8.1 Checking the BTS3900A Cabinets Supplied with AC

Power
After installing modules and cables in the cabinets used by the BTS3900A supplied
with AC power, check that the modules and cables are installed securely.

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the modules are securely installed in the cabinets and tighten the loose
screws.
Step 2 Check that the equipotential cable is installed securely, the power cables are
correctly connected, and the screws are tightened according to Figure 1-23 and
Table 1-7.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-23 Power cables and equipotential cable installed in the BTS3900A
cabinets supplied with AC power

Table 1-7 Power cables and equipotential cable installed in the BTS3900A cabinets
supplied with AC power
No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connecto Installation

tor Position r Position

P0 APM30H-RFC OT Ground bar in OT Ground bar in

equipotential termina the APM30H terminal the RFC
cable l

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connecto Installation

tor Position r Position

P1 Input power OT M4 ground OT L and N

cable for the termina screw and L1 terminal terminals on the
junction box l and N1 junction box in
terminals near the APM30H
the AC and the ground
OUTPUT bar in the
silkscreen on cabinet
the left side of
the EPU in the
APM30H

P2 FAN 02E/ EPC4 LOAD2 port on 3V3 PWR port on the

FAN02H connect the EPU in the power FAN 02E/
power cable or APM30H connector FAN02H in an
(in an (FAN APM30H
APM30H) 02E)/
EPC4
connector
(FAN02H)

P3 Power cable OT RFC1 or RFC2 OT DC junction box

for the DC termina terminal on terminal in the RFC
junction box l (M6) the EPU in the
in the RFC APM30H

P4 BBU power EPC4 LOAD0 or 3V3 -48V port on the

cable connect LOAD1 port on connector UPEU in the BBU
or the EPU in the in the APM30H
APM30H

P5 DCDU-12A OT DC junction OT RTN(+) and

power cable termina box in the RFC terminal NEG(-) terminals
l (M6) on the
DCDU-12A in an
RFC

P6 RFU power EPC4 LOAD0 to 3V3 PWR ports on

to cable connect LOAD5 ports connector RFU 0 to RFU 5
P11 or on the in the RFC
DCDU-12A in
an RFC

P12 FAN 01D EPC4 LOAD6 port on 3V3 PWR port on the
power cable connect the DCDU-12A connector FAN 01D in the
or in the RFC RFC

P13 EPU PGND OT Ground bar in OT Ground point in

cable termina the APM30H terminal the EPU
l

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Check that signal cables are connected securely and correctly in the cabinets
according to Figure 1-24 and Table 1-8.

Figure 1-24 Signal cables installed in the BTS3900A or the BTS5900A cabinets
supplied with AC power

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-8 Signal cables installed in the BTS3900A or the BTS5900A cabinets
supplied with AC power
No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connecto Installation

tor Position r Position

S0 Monitoring Intercon Fan power 4-pin FAN_EXT port on

signal nection cable routed connector the FAN 02E/
transfer cable termina out of the FAN02H in an
for the fan in l front door of APM30H
the front an APM30H
door

S1 PMIU-CCUB RJ45 PMI port on RJ45 PMI port on the

monitoring connect the PMIU in an connector FAN 02E/
signal cable/ or APM30H FAN02H in an
PMIU-CCUC APM30H
monitoring
signal cable

S2 Monitoring Bare GATE port on Bare wire Door status

signal cable wire the FAN 02E/ sensor
for the door FAN02H in an
status sensor APM30H
in an
APM30H

S3 ELU signal RJ45 ELU port on RJ45 RJ45 port on the

cable connect the FAN 02E/ connector ELU in each
or FAN02H in an cabinet
APM30H
ELU port on
the FAN 01D in
an RFC

S4 CCUB-BBU RJ45 COM_IN/ RJ45 MON0 port on

monitoring connect U_COM0 port connector the UPEU of the
signal cable/ or on the FAN BBU in an
CCUC-BBU 02E/FAN02H in APM30H
monitoring an APM30H
signal cable
COM_OUT/ MON1 port on
U_COM1 port the UPEU of the
on the FAN BBU in an
02E/FAN02H in APM30H
an APM30H

S5 CMUH-CCUB RJ45 COM_IN port RJ45 MON0-0/

monitoring connect on the FAN connector D_COM0-0 port
signal cable/ or 01D in an RFC on the FAN 02E/
CMUH-CCUC FAN02H in an
monitoring APM30H
signal cable

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connecto Installation

tor Position r Position

S6 Monitoring 4-pin TEM port on Temperat Air intake vent

signal cable connect the FAN 01D in ure at the bottom of
for the or an RFC sensor an RFC
temperature
sensor (in an
RFC)

S7 Monitoring Bare GATE port on Bare wire Door status

signal cable wire the FAN 01D in sensor
for the door an RFC
status sensor
in an RFC

CAUTION

Ensure that the PMIU is securely installed and the PMIU-CCUB monitoring signal
cable is securely connected. Otherwise, the storage batteries may be damaged
during discharge.

Step 4 Check whether transmission cables are connected securely and correctly in the
cabinets according to the following table.
NOTE

For the transmission cable connections of various RATs in various transmission modes, see
Transmission Cable Connections for 3900 Series Base Stations in 3900 & 5900 Series Base
Station Cables.

Table 1-9 Transmission cables installed in the BTS3900A cabinets

Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connecto Installation

Position r Position

E1/T1 surge DB26 E1/T1 port on the DB25 "INSIDE" port on

protection connector GTMU, WMPT, connector the UELP in an
transfer UMPT, or UTRP in SLPU
cable the BBU

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connecto Installation

Position r Position

FE/GE surge RJ45 ● FE electrical RJ45 FE electrical port

protection connector port on the connector near the INSIDE
transfer GTMU, WMPT, silkscreen on the
cable or UMPT in the UFLP in an SLPU
BBU
● FE electrical
port on the
LMPT or UMPT
in the BBU

Interconnect LC FE optical port on LC FE optical port on

ion cable connector the GTMU, WMPT, connector the GTMU, WMPT,
between FE LMPT, or UMPT in LMPT, or UMPT in
optical ports the BBU the BBU

Interconnect RJ45 FE electrical port RJ45 FE electrical port

ion cable connector on the GTMU, connector on the GTMU,
between FE WMPT, LMPT, or WMPT, LMPT, or
electrical UMPT in the BBU UMPT in the BBU
ports

Step 5 CPRI electrical cables have been installed in the cabinets as required before
delivery. You need to check whether the cables are connected securely. For details
about how to install or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing
CPRI Cables.

----End

1.8.2 Checking the BTS3900A Cabinets Supplied with -48 V DC

Power
Modules and cables have been installed in the BTS3900A cabinets supplied with
-48 V DC power before delivery. You need to check whether the modules and
cables are installed securely.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-25 Power cables and the equipotential cable installed in BTS3900A
cabinets supplied with -48 V DC power

Table 1-10 Power cables and the equipotential cable installed in BTS3900A
cabinets supplied with -48 V DC power
No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connect Installation

tor Position or Position

P0 TMC11H-RFC OT Ground bar OT Ground bar in the

equipotential termina in the terminal RFC
cable l TMC11H

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connect Installation

tor Position or Position

P1 DCDU-12C OT DC junction OT RTN(+) and

power cable termina box in the terminal NEG(-) terminals
l RFC on the DCDU-12C
in the TMC11H

P2 FAN 02E/ EPC4 LOAD9 port 3V3 PWR port on the

FAN02H connect on the connect FAN 02E/FAN02H
power cable or DCDU-12C in or in a TMC11H
the TMC11H

P3 BBU power EPC4 LOAD6 or 3V3 -48V port on the

cable connect LOAD7 port connect UPEU in the BBU
or on the or
DCDU-12C in
the TMC11H

P4 FAN 01D EPC4 LOAD6 port 3V3 PWR port on the

power cable connect on the connect FAN 01D in the
or DCDU-12A in or RFC
the RFC

P5 DCDU-12A OT DC junction OT RTN(+) and

power cable termina box in the terminal NEG(-) terminals
l RFC (M6) on the DCDU-12A
in an RFC

P6 RFU power EPC4 LOAD0 to 3V3 PWR ports on RFU

to cable connect LOAD5 ports connect 0 to RFU 5 in the
P11 or on the or RFC
DCDU-12A in
an RFC

Step 3 Check that signal cables are connected securely and correctly in the cabinets
according to Figure 1-26 and Table 1-11.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-26 Signal cables installed in the BTS3900A or the BTS5900A cabinets
supplied with -48 V DC power

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-11 Signal cables installed in the BTS3900A or the BTS5900A cabinets
supplied with -48 V DC power
No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connect Installation

tor Position or Position

S0 Monitoring Interco Fan power 4-pin FAN_EXT port on

signal transfer nnectio cable routed connect the FAN 02E/
cable for the n out of the or FAN02H in a
fan in the termina front door of TMC11H
front door l the TMC11H

S1 Monitoring 4-pin TEM port on Tempera Air intake vent at

signal cable connect the FAN 01D ture the bottom of an
for the or in an RFC sensor RFC
temperature
sensor (in an
RFC)

S2 Monitoring Bare ● GATE port Bare Door status sensor

signal cable wire on the wire
for the door FAN 02E/
status sensor FAN02H
in a
TMC11H
● GATE port
on the
FAN 01D
in an RFC

S3 ELU signal RJ45 ● ELU port RJ45 RJ45 port on the

cable connect on the connect ELU in the
or FAN 02E/ or TMC11H or the
FAN02H RFC
in a
TMC11H
● ELU port
on the
FAN 01D
in an RFC

S4 CCUB-BBU RJ45 COM_IN/ RJ45 MON0 port on the

monitoring connect U_COM0 connect UPEU in the BBU
signal cable/ or port on the or in the TMC11H
CCUC-BBU FAN 02E/
monitoring FAN02H in a
signal cable TMC11H

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

No. Cable One End The Other End

Connec Installation Connect Installation

tor Position or Position

COM_OUT/ MON1 port on the

U_COM1 UPEU in the BBU
port on the in the TMC11H
FAN 02E/
FAN02H in a
TMC11H

S5 CMUH-CCUB RJ45 COM_IN port RJ45 MON0-0/

monitoring connect on the FAN connect D_COM0-0 port
signal cable/ or 01D in an or on the FAN 02E/
CMUH-CCUC RFC FAN02H in a
monitoring TMC11H
signal cable

Step 4 Check whether transmission cables are connected securely and correctly in the
cabinets according to the following table.
NOTE

For the transmission cable connections of various RATs in various transmission modes, see
Transmission Cable Connections for 3900 Series Base Stations in 3900 & 5900 Series Base
Station Cables.

Table 1-12 Transmission cables installed in the BTS3900A cabinets

Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connecto Installation

Position r Position

E1/T1 surge DB26 E1/T1 port on the DB25 "INSIDE" port on

protection connector GTMU, WMPT, connector the UELP in an
transfer UMPT, or UTRP in SLPU
cable the BBU

FE/GE surge RJ45 ● FE electrical RJ45 FE electrical port

protection connector port on the connector near the INSIDE
transfer GTMU, WMPT, silkscreen on the
cable or UMPT in the UFLP in an SLPU
BBU
● FE electrical
port on the
LMPT or UMPT
in the BBU

Interconnect LC FE optical port on LC FE optical port on

ion cable connector the GTMU, WMPT, connector the GTMU, WMPT,
between FE LMPT, or UMPT in LMPT, or UMPT in
optical ports the BBU the BBU

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other End

Connector Installation Connecto Installation

Position r Position

Interconnect RJ45 FE electrical port RJ45 FE electrical port

ion cable connector on the GTMU, connector on the GTMU,
between FE WMPT, LMPT, or WMPT, LMPT, or
electrical UMPT in the BBU UMPT in the BBU
ports

----End

1.9 Installing a Base

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a base for a
cabinet.

Procedure
● Install a base for an APM5930(AC)/APM5930(DC)/BBC5200D/BBC5200T/
BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L.
a. Determine the position for installing the base.
i. Determine the position to install the cabinet according to the
engineering drawing and installation clearance requirements in the
introduction to installation.
ii. Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in
the following figure, to determine the position for installing the base.
iii. After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape
to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the
dimensions are accurate.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-27 Anchor points for a base

(1) Wall (2) Screw hole

b. Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolts into the holes,
as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION

Take proper safety measures to protect eyes and respiratory tract against
the dust before drilling holes.

NOTE

● After dismantling the expansion bolts, ensure that the top of each expansion
tube is level with the concrete floor. Otherwise, the cabinet cannot be
installed on the concrete floor evenly and securely.
● In most cases, the concrete floor is smooth. Therefore, use a chisel to make a
dent on the floor before using a hammer drill. Skip this step if the ground is
easy to drill.
i. Use a hammer drill with a Ф16 drill bit to drill holes at the anchor
points with a depth ranging from 55 mm to 60 mm (2.17 in. to 2.36
in.).
ii. Use a vacuum cleaner to wipe away any dust in and around the
holes and measure the spacing between holes. If any of the holes is
beyond the acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a
new hole.
iii. Tighten the expansion bolts slightly, and place each expansion bolt
vertically into each hole.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

iv. Use a rubber mallet to pound each expansion bolt until the
corresponding expansion tube completely enters the hole.
v. Turn the M12x60 bolt counterclockwise and remove the bolt, spring
washer, and flat washer in sequence.

Figure 1-28 Drilling holes and installing expansion bolts

(1) M12x60 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Expansion tube

c. Install the base, as shown in the following figure.

i. Place the base in a correct direction on the concrete pad.
ii. Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not
tighten them.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-29 Determining the position for installing a base

d. Adjust the base to a horizontal plane, as shown in the following figure.

i. Place the level on the base and observe the position of the bubble.
ii. The base is horizontal only when the bubble is in the center of the
level. Add spacers between the base and the concrete pad to adjust
the level if necessary.

Figure 1-30 Adjusting the levelness of a base

(1) Level (2) Spacer

e. Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts diagonally to 45 N·m

(398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-31 Tightening the bolts on a base

f. Optional: Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk

screws on the front cover plate for the base, and remove the front cover
plate, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Do not lose the removed screws and cover plate. They are required during future
installation.

Figure 1-32 Removing a front cover plate

● Install a base for an APM30H/TMC11H/RFC/IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

ii. Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in
the following figure, to determine the position for installing the base.
iii. After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape
to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the
dimensions are accurate.

Figure 1-33 Anchor points for a base

(1) Wall (2) Screw hole

b. Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolts into the holes,
as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION

Take proper safety measures to protect eyes and respiratory tract against
the dust before drilling holes.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

Figure 1-34 Drilling holes and installing expansion bolts

(1) M12x60 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Expansion tube

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

c. Install the base, as shown in the following figure.

i. Place the base in a correct direction on the concrete pad.
ii. Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not
tighten them.

Figure 1-35 Determining the position for installing a base

d. Adjust the base to a horizontal plane, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-36 Adjusting the levelness of a base

(1) Level (2) Spacer

e. Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts diagonally to 45 N·m

(398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-37 Tightening the bolts on a base

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

f. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M4 countersunk screws on

the front cover plate for the base, and remove the front cover plate, as
shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Do not lose the removed screws and cover plate. They are required during future
installation.

Figure 1-38 Removing a front cover plate

g. Optional: If an RFC will be installed on the base, the mounting blocks

need to be secured on the base to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in
the following figure.
NOTE

The mounting blocks are placed in the accessory package of the RFC.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-39 Securing mounting blocks

(1) Bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Mounting block

● Install a base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5300D/BBC5300T.

a. Determine the position for installing the base.
i. Determine the position to install the cabinet according to the
engineering drawing and installation clearance requirements in the
introduction to installation.
ii. Mark anchor points on the concrete pad, as shown by the circles in
the following figure, to determine the position for installing the base.
iii. After drawing the lines between anchor points, use a measuring tape
to measure the distance between anchor points to ensure that the
dimensions are accurate.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-40 Anchor points for a base

(1) Wall (2) Screw hole

b. Drill holes at the anchor points and insert expansion bolts into the holes,
as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION

Take proper safety measures to protect eyes and respiratory tract against
the dust before drilling holes.

NOTE

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

i. Use a hammer drill with a Ф16 drill bit to drill holes at the anchor
points with a depth ranging from 55 mm to 60 mm (2.17 in. to 2.36
in.).
ii. Use a vacuum cleaner to wipe away any dust in and around the
holes and measure the spacing between holes. If any of the holes is
beyond the acceptable range, mark a new anchor point and drill a
new hole.
iii. Tighten the expansion bolts slightly, and place each expansion bolt
vertically into each hole.
iv. Use a rubber mallet to pound each expansion bolt until the
corresponding expansion tube completely enters the hole.
v. Turn the M12x60 bolt counterclockwise and remove the bolt, spring
washer, and flat washer in sequence.

Figure 1-41 Drilling holes and installing expansion bolts

(1) M12x60 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Expansion tube

c. Install the base, as shown in the following figure.

i. Place the base in a correct direction on the concrete pad.
ii. Insert the M12x60 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers, but do not
tighten them.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-42 Placing a base for a cabinet

d. Adjust the base to a horizontal plane, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-43 Adjusting the levelness of a base

(1) Level (2) Spacer

e. Use a torque wrench to tighten the M12x60 bolts diagonally to 45 N·m

(398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-44 Tightening the bolts on a base

f. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the three M6 countersunk screws on

the front cover plate for the base, and remove the front cover plate, as
shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Do not lose the removed screws and cover plate. They are required during future
installation.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-45 Removing a front cover plate

g. Remove the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of the base, as
shown in the following figure.
i. Loosen the butterfly nuts on both sides of the base and move away
the side plates.
ii. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two M6 screw assemblies on
the rear left side of the base and slide the baffle plates to the left.
Then, remove the baffle plates on the right.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-46 Removing the baffle plates from both sides and the rear of a
base

----End

1.10 Installing the Cabinet

When installing the cabinet, choose an appropriate method based on the outdoor
conditions.

1.10.1 Installing Cabinets on a Base

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing two stacked
cabinets or a single cabinet on a base.

Context

NOTICE

A battery cabinet (IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T) configured with

storage batteries cannot be lifted.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
● To secure an APM30H or TMC11H and an RFC onto a base, perform the
following operations:
NOTE

● In AC scenarios, the APM30H and RFC have been stacked before delivery.
● In DC scenarios, the TMC11H and RFC have been stacked before delivery.
a. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove four M12x20 plastic screws on the
top of a cabinet, and then install lifting eyes to the holes, as shown in the
following figure.

NOTICE

Reserve the plastic screws for later use.

Figure 1-47 Installing the lifting eyes

(1) Plastic screw (2) Lifting eye

b. Bind lifting slings to the lifting eyes, and then hoist the cabinet, as shown
in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-48 Installing the slings

c. Move the cabinet onto the top of the base and lightly push the cabinet to
horizontally slide the support brace into the trough on the rear of the
cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION

At least two installation personnel are required for hoisting a cabinet.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-49 Lifting a cabinet onto a base

d. Remove the slings and use a flat-head screwdriver to secure the four
M12x20 plastic screws on the top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

NOTICE

Before installing the plastic screws, clean the mounting holes to prevent
entry of metal bits.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-50 Installing the plastic screws

e. Use two M12x35 bolts to secure the cabinet onto the base, and use a
torque wrench to tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 1-51 Securing the RFC onto the base

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof
rubber washer

● To install a TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T on a base, perform the following

operations:

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

● The procedure for installing an IBBS200D is used as an example.

● If the TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T is not required for a base station, skip the
following procedure.
a. Lift the cabinet onto the base and align the bolt holes on the bottom of
the cabinet with those on the base, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-52 Lifting the IBBS200D onto the base

b. Use four M12x35 bolts to secure the cabinet onto the base, and use a
torque wrench to tighten the bolts diagonally to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.),
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

This section uses the IBBS200D (Ver.D) as an example.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-53 Securing the IBBS200D onto the base

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof (5) Gasket with
washer rubber washer an oblong hole

● To install an IBBS300D or IBBS300T on a base, perform the following

operations:
NOTE

● The procedure for installing an IBBS300D is used as an example.

● If the IBBS300D or IBBS300T is not required for a base station, skip the following
procedure.
a. Lift the cabinet onto the base and align the bolt holes on the bottom of
the cabinet with those on the base, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-54 Lifting the IBBS300D onto the base

b. Use four M12x35 bolts to secure the cabinet onto the base, and use a
torque wrench to tighten the bolts in a diagonal sequence to 45 N·m
(398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-55 Securing the IBBS300D onto the base

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof
rubber washer

----End

1.10.2 Stacking Two Cabinets

This section describes the procedure and precautions for stacking a cabinet on an
installed one.

Context
The BTS3900A or BTS5900A supports the following stacking scenarios: an
APM30H/TMC11H stacked on an RFC, a TMC11H stacked on an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L, and two battery cabinets of the same type (IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5200D-L/BBC5300D-L) stacked on each other.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the lower cabinet on the base. For detailed operations, see "Installing
Cabinets on a Base".

Step 2 Remove the cover plates from the cable outlets at the top of the cabinet, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-56 Removing the cover plates from the cable outlets

Step 3 Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-57 Removing the plastic screws

Step 4 Stack the cabinets and ensure that the installation holes on the upper cabinet are
aligned with the installation holes on the lower cabinet, as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-58 Stacking the cabinets

Step 5 Use a torque wrench to secure the four M12x35 bolts inside the cabinet in a
diagonal sequence to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

The gasket in the following figure is not required when IBBS300D/IBBS300T cabinets are
stacked.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-59 Tightening the bolts

(1) M12x35 bolt (2) Spring washer (3) Flat washer (4) Waterproof (5) Gasket with
rubber washer an oblong hole

----End

1.11 Installing a PGND Cable and an Equipotential

Cable
A PGND cable connects a PGND screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure
proper grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on
different cabinets to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.

Prerequisites
The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-
purpose crimping tool.

Context
The principles for grounding are as follows:

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential

cable.
● The lower cabinet is connected to the RFC through an equipotential cable.
● The RFC is connected to the ground busbar through a PGND cable.
The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential
cable.

Table 1-13 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

Cable Cross-Sectional Area of Color
the Cable and Size of
the OT Terminal

PGND cable OT terminal (M6, 16 ● 220 V AC or -48 V DC

mm2 or 0.025 in.2) input: green and
yellow
Equipotential cable OT terminal (M6, 16
● 110 V AC input: green
mm2 or 0.025 in.2)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable by following the instructions in
Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 1-61.
1. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of
the RFC, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
NOTE

When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-60 Correct and incorrect directions for installing an OT terminal

2. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground copper bar,
as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-61 Installing a PGND cable

(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) PGND cable (3) Ground bar of the site

Step 3 Install the equipotential cable.

The following figure shows the positions for installing the equipotential cables in
cabinets. For detailed operations, refer to Step 2.

Figure 1-62 Installing equipotential cables

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.12 Installing Optional Modules and Their Cables

This section describes procedures for installing the optional modules and their
cables onsite.

1.12.1 Installing the SLPU as a Monitoring Signal Protection

Unit
When an outdoor base station uses one to sixteen customized alarm inputs, you
need to install the SLPU as a monitoring signal protection unit and its cables.

Context
● The following table lists the cable specifications of the SLPU.

Table 1-14 Cable specifications

Cable One End The Other End Remarks

Surge protection RJ45 connector RJ45 connector Gray shielded

transfer cable for straight-through
monitoring cable
signals

External dry Bare wire Depending on -

contact the external
monitoring equipment
signal cable

● An SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under a BBU.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform required operations according to the type of a cabinet.

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) or TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H Go to Step 2.

(Ver.C)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H Go to Step 3.

(Ver.E)

Step 2 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler
module, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting
ear on each side of the filler module.
2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE

The removed filler modules must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet
from top down. If vacant slots are all occupied with filler modules, other redundant filler
modules are discarded.

Figure 1-63 Removing the filler module

Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

The removed air baffles must be installed in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet
from top down. If vacant slots are all occupied with air baffles, other redundant air baffles are
discarded.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-64 Removing the air baffle

Step 4 Install the cable claws, as shown in the following figure.

1. Remove the four M4 screws from the mounting ear on each side of the SLPU.
2. Place a cable claw between the mounting ear and the SLPU on each side,
move the mounting ear backwards by one hole, and align the mounting holes
in the cable claw with those in the mounting ear and the SLPU.
3. Use two removed M4 screws to secure the mounting ear and cable claw to
the SLPU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-65 Installing cable claws on the SLPU

Step 5 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two
M6x12 screws on the mounting ears to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-66 Installing the SLPU

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Install the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring signals, as shown in
the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the
SLPU.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the
BBU.

Figure 1-67 Installing the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring
signals

NOTE

The number of surge protection transfer cables for monitoring signals depends on the
actual number of customized alarms. A maximum of four such cables are supported, as
shown in the following figure. For details about the numbers of customized alarms and
cable connections, see section "Customized Alarm Input Principles" in the related hardware
description.

Figure 1-68 Connections of the surge protection transfer cable for the monitoring
signals

Step 7 Install an external dry contact monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Cut the external dry contact monitoring signal cable to the length suitable for
the actual cable route.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

2. Strip an 8 mm (0.31 in) length of the jacket off the cable connected to the
USLP2 to expose the wires.
3. Use a screwdriver to press the IN0 port on the USLP, insert an external dry
contact monitoring signal cable into the port, and move the screwdriver away.
Then, repeat this procedure to insert external dry contact monitoring signal
cables into IN1 to IN3 ports.

Figure 1-69 Installing external dry contact monitoring signal cables

Step 8 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.12.2 Installing the EMUA/EMUB and Its Cables

This section describes the procedure for installing the EMUA/EMUB and its cables
in different cabinets.

1.12.2.1 Installing an EMUA/EMUB

When an outdoor base station uses 17 to 32 customized alarm inputs, you need to
install an EMUA/EMUB and its cables.

Context
● An EMUA or EMUB is installed in a reserved slot in a cabinet. In normal cases,
it is installed in the 1 U space under the installed devices in a cabinet.
● The following table lists the specifications of EMUA or EMUB cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-15 Cable specifications

Cable Color One End The Other End

Most UK
Region
s

EMUA RTN(+) Black Blue EPC4 2-pin connector

or wire connector
EMUB
power NEG(-) Blue Gray
cable wire

EMUA or EMUB Black Black DB9 male RJ45 connector

monitoring signal connector
cable

● This section uses an EMUB as an example. An EMUA is installed in the same

way as an EMUB.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform required operations according to the type of an APM30H.

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)/TMC11H Go to Step 2.

(Ver.C)

APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H Go to Step 3.

(Ver.E)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-70 Removing the filler module

Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Figure 1-71 Removing the air baffle

Step 4 Optional: Align the holes on the cable claws with the holes on the mounting ears
on both sides of the EMUB, and stick the cable claws onto both sides of the
EMUB, as shown in the following figure. If an EMUA is to be installed, skip this
step.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-72 Sticking cable claws onto an EMUB

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 5 Install the EMUA or EMUB, as shown in the following figure.

1. Slowly slide the EMUA or EMUB into the installation position.
2. Tighten the four M6 screws on the mounting ear on both sides of the EMUA
or EMUB to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-73 Installing the EMUA or EMUB

Step 6 Prepare an EMUA/EMUB power cable.

1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

2. Add a 2-pin connector to one end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable by

following the instructions in Assembling a 2-Pin Connector.
3. Add a corresponding connector to the other end of the EMUA/EMUB power
cable depending on the power equipment, as listed in the following table.

Table 1-16 Methods of adding a connector to the EMUA/EMUB power cable

Cabine Base Power Installation Method of Adding a
t Type Station Equipme Position Connector
Type nt

APM30 BTS3900A EPS DC output Assembling a Female

H 01A/EPS terminal Fast Connector
(Ver.B) 01C "LOAD7" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

DBS3900 EPS DC output Assembling a Female

01B/EPS terminal Fast Connector
01D "LOAD7" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

TMC11 BTS3900A DCDU-03 DC output Assembling the OT

H C terminal Terminal and the
(Ver.B) "LOAD7" Power Cable

DBS3900 DCDU-03 DC output Assembling the OT

B terminal Terminal and the
"LOAD7" Power Cable

APM30 BTS3900A EPU03A-0 DC output Assembling a Female

H 2/04 terminal Fast Connector
(Ver.C) "LOAD4" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

DBS3900 EPU03A-0 DC output Assembling a Female

3/05 terminal Fast Connector
"LOAD4" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

TMC11 BTS3900A DCDU-11 DC output Assembling a Female

H C terminal Fast Connector
(Ver.C) "LOAD8" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

DBS3900 DCDU-11 DC output Assembling a Female

B terminal Fast Connector
"LOAD8" (Pressfit Type) and
the Power Cable (1)

APM30 BTS3900A EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H 2/04 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD5" Power Cable

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabine Base Power Installation Method of Adding a

t Type Station Equipme Position Connector
Type nt

APM30 DBS3900 EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H 3/05 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD5" Power Cable

TMC11 BTS3900A DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H C terminal Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD8" Power Cable

TMC11 DBS3900 DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H B terminal Connector and the
(Ver.D) "LOAD8" Power Cable

APM30 BTS3900A/ EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H BTS5900A 6/08 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD5" Power Cable

APM30 DBS3900/ EPU05A-0 DC output fuse Assembling an EPC4

H DBS5900 7/09 terminal block Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD5" Power Cable

TMC11 BTS3900A/ DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H BTS5900A C terminal Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD8" Power Cable

TMC11 DBS3900/ DCDU-12 DC output Assembling an EPC4

H DBS5900 B terminal Connector and the
(Ver.E) "LOAD8" Power Cable

Step 7 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the power cable to the "PWR1"
port on the EMUA or EMUB.
2. Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding power
equipment, as listed in Table 1-16 and shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-74 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cable (in an APM30H)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-75 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cable (in a TMC11H)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
4. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-
Tying Label.
Step 8 Install the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the cable to the "RS-485" port
on the EMUA or the "COM_485" port on the EMUB.
2. In a Ver.B/Ver.C/Ver.D cabinet, connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of
the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the PMU. In a Ver.E cabinet, connect the
RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the "MON1-1/D_COM1-1"
port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-76 Installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable (in an

APM30H)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-77 Installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable (in a

TMC11H)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
4. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-
Shaped Label.

----End

1.12.2.2 Installing an EMUA/EMUB in a TMC11H

When an outdoor base station uses 17 to 32 customized alarm inputs, you need to
install an EMUA/EMUB and its cables.

Table 1-17 Cable specifications

Cable Color One End The Other End

Most UK
Region
s

EMUA RTN(+) Black Blue EPC4 2-pin connector

or wire connector
EMUB
power NEG(-) Blue Gray
cable wire

EMUA or EMUB Black Black DB9 male RJ45 connector

monitoring signal connector
cable

● This section uses an EMUB as an example. An EMUA is installed in the same

way as an EMUB.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform required operations according to the type of a TMC11H.

If... Then...

The cabinet type is TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C) Go to Step 2.

The cabinet type is TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E) Go to Step 3.

Step 2 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler
module, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting
ear on each side of the filler module.
2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE

Figure 1-78 Removing the filler module

Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Figure 1-79 Removing the air baffle

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-80 Sticking cable claws onto an EMUB

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 5 Install the EMUA or EMUB, as shown in the following figure.

1. Slowly slide the EMUA or EMUB into the installation position.
2. Tighten the four M6 screws on the mounting ear on both sides of the EMUA
or EMUB to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-81 Installing the EMUA or EMUB

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Prepare an EMUA/EMUB power cable.

1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add a 2-pin connector to one end of the EMUA/EMUB power cable by
following the instructions in Assembling a 2-Pin Connector.
3. Add a corresponding connector to the other end of the EMUA/EMUB power
cable depending on the power equipment, as listed in the following table.

Table 1-18 Adding a connector to the EMUA/EMUB power cable

Base Station Application Power Method of
Type Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

BTS3900A - DCDU-12C Assembling an

(Ver.D)/(Ver.E) EPC4 Connector
and the Power
Cable

DBS3900 The EMUA/ DCDU-12B Assembling an

EMUB is EPC4 Connector
installed in the and the Power
TMC11H (Ver.D)/ Cable
(Ver.E).

BTS3900A - DCDU-11C Assembling a

(Ver.C) Female Fast
Connector
(Pressfit Type)
and the Power
Cable (1)

DBS3900 The EMUA/ DCDU-11B Assembling a

EMUB is Female Fast
installed in the Connector
TMC11H (Ver.C). (Pressfit Type)
and the Power
Cable (1)

BTS3900A - DCDU-03C Assembling the

(Ver.B) OT Terminal and
the Power Cable

DBS3900 The EMUA/ DCDU-03B Assembling the

EMUB is OT Terminal and
installed in the the Power Cable
TMC11H (Ver.B).

Step 7 Install the EMUA/EMUB power cable.

1. Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the power cable to the "PWR1"
port on the EMUA or EMUB.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

2. Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding power
equipment, as listed in the following table.

Table 1-19 Installation position of the EMUA/EMUB power cable

Base Station Application Power Installation
Type Scenario Equipment Position

BTS3900A - DCDU-12C DC output

(Ver.D)/(Ver.E) terminal
"LOAD8"

DBS3900 The EMUA/ DCDU-12B DC output

EMUB is terminal
installed in the "LOAD8"
TMC11H (Ver.D)/
(Ver.E).

BTS3900A - DCDU-11C DC output

(Ver.C) terminal
"LOAD8"

DBS3900 The EMUA/ DCDU-11B DC output

EMUB is terminal
installed in the "LOAD8"
TMC11H (Ver.C).

BTS3900A - DCDU-03C DC output

(Ver.B) terminal
"LOAD7"

DBS3900 The EMUA/ DCDU-03B DC output

EMUB is terminal
installed in the "LOAD7"
TMC11H (Ver.B).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-82 Installing the EMUA/EMUB power cable

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
4. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-
Tying Label.
Step 8 Install the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the cable to the "RS-485" port
on the EMUA or the "COM_485" port on the EMUB.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to the "COM_OUT"
port on the fan assembly in the Ver.B/Ver.C/Ver.D cabinet. Connect the RJ45
connector at the other end of the cable to the "MON1-1/D_COM1-1" port on
the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the Ver.E cabinet.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-83 Installing the EMUA/EMUB monitoring signal cable

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
4. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-
Shaped Label.

----End

1.12.3 Installing the GPS Surge Protector

The GPS surge protector can be installed at a site to provide surge protection for
GPS signals.

Context
A satellite card needs to be installed onsite only for a USCU that supports two
satellite cards. To install a satellite card, perform steps 1 to 3.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Loosen the two M3 screws on the panel of the USCU and pull it out, as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-84 Removing the USCU

Step 2 Optional: Install a satellite card on the USCU, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the three M1.6 screws on the USCU.
2. Place the satellite card on the USCU, aligning the mounting holes on the
satellite card with the bolts on the USCU.
3. Use the three M1.6 screws removed in step a to secure the satellite card, and
tighten the screws to 0.1 N·m (0.89 lbf·in.).
4. Connect one end of the RF jumper for the satellite card to the RF port on the
satellite card, and connect the other end to the "GPS" port on the USCU.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

There are six mounting holes on the satellite card. You only need to install the three screws
shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-85 Installing a satellite card on the USCU

(1) Satellite card (2) RF jumper for the satellite card

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Optional: Install the USCU equipped with the satellite card into the BBU, and
tighten the captive screws on the USCU to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Step 4 Secure the GPS clock signal cable onto the support, and tighten the screws to 6.5
N·m (57.53 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-86 Securing the GPS clock signal cable onto the support

(1) GPS clock signal cable (2) Support

Step 5 Secure the support onto the inner left wall of the cabinet with a torque of 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-87 Securing the support onto the cabinet

Step 6 Optional: Connect the GPS clock signal cable to the "GPS" port on the USCU or
UMPT, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-88 Installing a GPS clock signal cable

Step 7 Use a torque wrench to secure the "Protect" port on the GPS surge protector onto
the type N50 straight female connector on one end of the GPS signal cable with a
torque of 4 N·m (35.40 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

● The UMPTg supports surge protection. Therefore, no GPS surge protector is required.
● The exterior of the GPS surge protector in this section is for reference only. The actual
exterior may be different.

Figure 1-89 Installing the GPS surge protector

(1) GPS surge protector

Step 8 Use a torque wrench to secure the GPS jumper to the "Surge" port on the GPS
surge protector with a torque of 4 N·m (35.40 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-90 Installing the GPS jumper

Step 9 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 10 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.12.4 Installing a GATM and a Bias-Tee

If the DRFU is installed at a site, a GATM and a Bias-Tee must be installed.

Context
A Bias-Tee couples the DC power or OOK signals into the feeder and a GATM is
connected to the antenna through the Bias-Tee. When a DRFU is configured, a
GATM and a Bias-Tee must be installed, and usually a straight DIN Bias-Tee is
used.
The following figure shows the ports on a straight DIN Bias-Tee and the following
table describes the cable connections on the straight DIN Bias-Tee.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-91 Ports on a straight DIN Bias-Tee

Table 1-20 Cable connections on a straight DIN Bias-Tee

No. Cable Connected to Each Port

1 Feeder for the antenna system

2 Bias-Tee and RET control signal cable. The other end of the
cable is connected to any port from "ANT0" to "ANT5" on the
GATM.

3 PGND cable

4 Jumper for the base station

This section describes the procedure for installing a GATM and a Bias-Tee in a
BTS3900A (Ver.D). The procedure for installing a GATM and a Bias-Tee in a
BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.E) is the same as the
procedure for installing a GATM and a Bias-Tee in a BTS3900A (Ver.D).
The GATM must be installed closely below the BBU. If two GATM boards are
needed, install them next to each other below the BBU. The upper GATM is called
GATM0, and the lower GATM is called GATM1.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the GATM, as shown in the following figure.
1. Slide the GATM into the correct position slowly.
2. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M6 screws on the mounting ears
on both sides of the GATM to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-92 Installing a GATM

Step 2 Install the power cable for the GATM.

1. Connect the end with a 3V3 connector to the "-48V" port on the GATM and
tighten the screws on the connector using a torque screwdriver to 0.6 N·m
(5.31 lbf·in.).
2. Add a connector to the other end of the cable according to the type of power
equipment and connect the end to the power equipment.
Bas Cabinet Power Installation Method of Adding a
e Type Equipment Position Connector
Sta
tio
n

BTS APM30H DCDU-01 in – GATM0: Serial terminal. No need

390 (Ver.B) the RFC SPARE1 port to be added onsite.
0A – GATM1:
(Ve BBU port
r.B)
TMC11H DCDU-03C in – GATM0: Add OT terminals
(Ver.B) the TMC11H LOAD8 port according to the
– GATM1: instructions in
LOAD7 port Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power
Cable.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Bas Cabinet Power Installation Method of Adding a

e Type Equipment Position Connector
Sta
tio
n

BTS APM30H – GATM0: – GATM0: Add a female fast

390 (Ver.C) DCDU-11 LOAD7 port connector (pressfit type)
0A A in the – GATM1: according to the
(Ve RFC BBU1 port instructions in
r.C) – GATM1: Assembling the Female
EPU03A-0 Fast Connector (Pressfit
2 or Type) and the Power
EPU03A-0 Cable (2).
4 in the
APM30H

TMC11H DCDU-11C in – GATM0:

(Ver.C) the TMC11H LOAD8 port
– GATM1:
LOAD6 port

BTS APM30H – GATM0: – GATM0: Add an EPC4 connector

390 (Ver.D) DCDU-12 LOAD7 port according to the
0A A in the – GATM1: instructions in
(Ve RFC LOAD5 port Assembling the EPC4
r.D) – GATM1: Connector and the
EPU05A-0 Power Cable.
2 or
EPU05A-0
4 in the
APM30H

TMC11H DCDU-12C in – GATM0:

(Ver.D) the TMC11H LOAD8 port
– GATM1:
LOAD7 port

BTS APM30H – GATM0: – GATM0: Add an EPC4 connector

390 (Ver.E) DCDU-12 LOAD7 port according to the
0A A in the – GATM1: instructions in
(Ve RFC LOAD5 port Assembling the EPC4
r.E) – GATM1: Connector and the
/ EPU05A-0 Power Cable.
BTS 6 or
590 EPU05A-0
0A 8 in the
APM30H

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Bas Cabinet Power Installation Method of Adding a

e Type Equipment Position Connector
Sta
tio
n

TMC11H DCDU-12C in – GATM0:

(Ver.E) the TMC11H LOAD8 port
– GATM1:
LOAD7 port

Step 3 Install the monitoring signal cable for the GATM.

1. Optional: For a Ver.B, Ver.C, or Ver.D cabinet, connect one end of the cable to
the "COM1" port on the GATM and the other end to the "MON0" or "MON1"
port on the BBU.
2. Optional: For a Ver.E cabinet, connect one end of the cable to the "COM1"
port on the GATM and the other end to "COM_OUT/U_COM1" or "MON1-1/
D_COM1-1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H.

Step 4 Install the CMUA/CMUE/CMUEA/CMUH-GATM monitoring signal cable.

1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM2" port on the GATM.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the fan assembly
in the cabinet.
NOTE

The fan assembly may be one of the following types, depending on the type of the
cabinet: FAN 01A, FAN 01B, FAN 01C, FAN 01D, FAN 02A, FAN 02B, and FAN 02D.

Step 5 Route RF jumpers to the cabinet according to one of the routes shown in Figure
1-93.

Figure 1-93 Routing of RF jumpers

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Install the Bias-Tee, as shown in Figure 1-94.

Figure 1-94 Installing the Bias-Tee

(1) Bias-Tee (2) Straight DIN connector (3) RF jumper

NOTE

It is recommended that the lower Bias-Tee be installed first.

Step 7 Install the RET antenna control signal cable, with one end connected to the "DC/
OOK" port on the Bias-Tee and the other end to the "ANT0" to "ANT5" ports on
the GATM, as shown in Figure 1-95 or Figure 1-96.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-95 Installing the RET antenna control signal cable (1)

Figure 1-96 Installing the RET antenna control signal cable (2)

Step 8 Attach color codings to RF jumpers according to instructions in Engineering Label

for the Antenna System and Attaching the Color Ring.

----End

1.12.5 Installing the DDF

The digital distribution frame (DDF) distributes alarm cables and E1/T1 cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
● The DDF is installed in the 1 U space reserved in the cabinet.
● In the digital distribution module, a, b, and s have different meanings.
– a and b indicate signal cables.
– s indicates a PGND cable.
● Alarm cables are routed on the left side of the DDF, and E1/T1 cables are
routed on the right side of the DDF. All cables are routed from the top down.
● The following procedure uses a twisted pair cable as an example. When
installing an E1 coaxial cable, install an insulation pad between the wiring
terminal and the DDF.

Procedure
Step 1 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the device side. This twisted pair
cable is connected to the BBU.
1. Insert the bare wires at one end of the twisted pair cable to the corresponding
digital distribution module according to the colors and labels of the wires.
2. Use an impact tool to seat the wires of the twisted pair cable into the
terminal blocks on the DDF, as shown in Figure 1-97.
Step 2 Distribute the twisted pair cable on the DDF on the cable side. This twisted pair
cable is connected to the peer equipment.
1. Insert the bare wires at one end of the twisted pair cable to the corresponding
digital distribution module according to the colors and labels of the wires.
2. Use an impact tool to seat the wires of the twisted pair cable into the
terminal blocks on the DDF, as shown in Figure 1-97.
Step 3 Arrange the wires on the DDF, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-97 Cabling on the DDF

NOTE

● After distributing cables on the DDF, ensure that no bare wire is exposed outside the
DDF.
● When interconnecting cables on both sides of the DDF, interconnect wires according to
actual situations. The colors of interconnected wires must be the same.

Step 4 Perform required operations according to the type of a cabinet.

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Go to Step 5.

APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Go to Step 6.

Step 5 Optional: If there is a filler module in the installation position, remove the filler
module, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting
ear on each side of the filler module.
2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.
NOTE

Figure 1-98 Removing the filler module

Step 6 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Figure 1-99 Removing the air baffle

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 7 Check whether floating nuts are installed on both sides of the 19-inch rack. If no,
install the floating nuts delivered with the DDF to both sides of the rack.

Step 8 Align the DDF with the cabinet, slide it into the cabinet, and use a screwdriver to
tighten four M6x12 screws on both sides of the DDF to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-100 Installing the DDF

----End

1.12.6 Installing Storage Batteries

This section describes the procedure for installing storage batteries in the
BBC5200T-L/IBBS200D/IBBS200T and IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

1.12.6.1 Installing Lithium Batteries in a BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L

When an outdoor base station requires long-term backup power, install lithium
batteries and their cables in the lithium battery cabinet.

Context

DANGER

● During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal
conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet.
● During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the
positive and negative poles of the lead-acid batteries.
● All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of lead-acid
batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the power input and output switches for the lithium batteries are
turned off to avoid high current. The correct positions of the switches are shown
by "1", "2", and "3" in the following figure.

Figure 1-101 Power switches for lithium batteries

(1) Button switch for the (2) Button switch for the (3) "BAT" circuit breaker on
lithium battery circuit on the lithium battery circuit on the the power distribution box in
EPU05A EPU05A the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L

Step 2 Adjust the mounting ears of a lithium battery before installing the lithium battery.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the six M4 screws from both sides of the
lithium battery, remove the mounting ears, move the mounting ears 60 mm (2.36
in.) backward, and reinstall the mounting ears on both sides of the lithium battery.
Tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-102 Adjusting the mounting ears of the lithium battery

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 The lithium batteries should be installed along the guide rails in the sequence
indicated by the numbers in the following figure so that certain spacing is
reserved between the lithium batteries. Manually install the four M6 screws on the
mounting ears on both sides of each lithium battery, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten them to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.).
NOTE

According to the actual site situation, a maximum of four 100 Ah lithium batteries can be
installed in the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L.

Figure 1-103 Installing lithium batteries

Step 4 Install PGND cables for lithium batteries. Connect the OT terminal (M6) at one
end of each PGND cable for the lithium battery to the ground point on the lithium
battery, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48
lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

One end of each PGND cable is connected to the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L cabinet before
delivery. You only need to connect the other end of each cable onsite.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-104 Installing PGND cables for lithium batteries

Step 5 Install the power cables for the lithium batteries, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

One end of each lithium battery power cable is connected to the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L
cabinet before delivery. You only need to connect the other end of each cable onsite.
1. Remove the terminal covers from the poles of the lithium batteries.
2. Connect the OT terminal (M6) at one end of each black power cable to the
"-" end on the right of a lithium battery, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminal (M6) at one end of each red power cable to the "+"
end on the right of a lithium battery, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten
the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-105 Installing power cables for lithium batteries

Step 6 When installing an activation cable for the lithium battery, connect the 2-pin
connector on one end of the activation cable for the lithium battery to the
activation port ("PWR" port) on the lithium battery, as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE

● One end of each activation cable for the lithium battery is connected to the BBC5200D-L/
BBC5200T-L cabinet before delivery. You only need to connect the other end of each cable
onsite.
● When there are two or more 100 Ah lithium batteries in the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L, you
only need to install the activation cables for two lithium batteries from bottom to top. When
there is only one 100 Ah lithium battery in the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L, you only need to
install an activation cable for the lithium battery.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-106 Installing the activation cables for lithium batteries

Step 7 Install monitoring signal cables between cascaded lithium batteries in a single
cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE

● Connect the monitoring signal cables between cascaded lithium batteries from bottom to
top.
● In a single cabinet, install three monitoring cables for cascaded lithium batteries when the
BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L is fully configured.
● In a stacked scenario, connect the "COM_OUT" port on the uppermost lithium battery in the
basic lithium battery cabinet to the "COM_IN" port on the lithium battery at the bottom of
the extension lithium battery cabinet.
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable
between cascaded lithium batteries to the "COM_OUT" port on the lithium
battery.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable
between cascaded lithium batteries to the "COM_IN" port on the upper
lithium battery.
3. After the monitoring signal cable between cascaded lithium batteries is
installed, install a build-out resistor on the "COM_OUT" port on the
uppermost lithium battery.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-107 Installing monitoring signal cables between cascaded lithium

batteries

----End

1.12.6.2 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to
install storage batteries and the power cables in the battery cabinet.

Context

DANGER

● During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal
conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet.
● During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the
positive and negative poles of the storage batteries.
● All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of storage
batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Check that the power input and output switches for the batteries are turned off to
avoid high current. The correct positions of the switches are shown by "1" and "2"
in Figure 1-108.

Figure 1-108 Power switches for storage batteries

(1) Button switch for storage batteries (2) "BAT" circuit breaker on the power
distribution box in the storage battery cabinet

Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in
Figure 1-109.
NOTE

The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is
reserved between the storage batteries.

Figure 1-109 Installing storage batteries

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Install the power cables for the batteries, as shown in Figure 1-110.
1. Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.
2. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries, and
tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
3. Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the
batteries. The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the
red cable is the power cable for the positive pole. Tighten the screws to 4.8
N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-110 Installing power cables for storage batteries

The following figure shows how the power cables are routed in the battery
cabinet.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-111 Routing of power cables for storage batteries

----End

1.12.6.3 Installing Storage Batteries in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

When an outdoor base station requires the long-term backup power, you need to
install storage batteries and their power cables in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Prerequisites
Before installing a storage battery, check whether the voltage of the storage
battery is normal.
● The voltage of a 2 V storage battery ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
● The voltage of a 12 V storage battery ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.
● The total voltage of the 48 V storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.
Ensure that the power input and output switches for the storage batteries are
turned off to avoid high current. The positions of the switches are shown in the
following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-112 Power switches for storage batteries

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-113 Power switches for storage batteries

Context

DANGER

● During the installation, avoid any contact between the exposed metal
conductors in the power cables and the metal housing of the cabinet.
● During the installation, avoid short circuits or reverse connections between the
positive and negative poles of the storage batteries.
● All tools used for installation must be insulated to avoid burning of storage
batteries and to ensure personal safety.

Procedure
Step 1 Install storage batteries in the sequence shown in the following figure.
NOTE

The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is
reserved between the storage batteries.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-114 Installing storage batteries

Step 2 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.

1. Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end of the black cable to the "NEG(-)"
terminal in the DC junction box in the inner left side of the battery cabinet,
and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the cable to the negative wiring
terminal on the storage batteries, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screw.
2. Connect the M6 OT terminal at one end of the red cable to the terminal on
the circuit breaker in the battery cabinet, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). Connect the OT terminal at the
other end of the cable to the positive wiring terminal on the storage batteries,
and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screw.
NOTE

The screws on the copper bars and wiring terminals of storage batteries are the same. There are
two types of screws: M6 and M8, with a torque of 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.) and 8 N·m (70.81
lbf·in.), respectively.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-115 Installing power cables for storage batteries

Step 3 Install copper bars between storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the terminal covers from poles of the storage batteries.
2. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries.

Figure 1-116 Installing copper bars for storage batteries

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 4 Install the terminal covers onto the poles of the storage batteries.

----End

1.12.7 Installing a DCDU-12B

You need to install a DCDU-12B and its cables when RRUs are added to a base
station regardless of whether the base station is originally configured with only
RFUs or with RFUs and RRUs.

Context
● The following figure shows the installation positions of DCDU-12Bs in
different cabinets.

Table 1-21 Installation positions of DCDU-12Bs

Base Station Application Scenario Installation Position

BTS3900A (Ver.D) In a cabinet serving 1 1 U space at the top of

to 9 RRUs the RFC

BTS3900A (Ver.E) In a cabinet serving 1 1 U space below the

to 6 RRUs in DC BBU in the TMC11H
scenarios

In a cabinet serving 7 1 U space at the top of

to 15 RRUs in DC the RFC
scenarios

DBS3900 In an APM30H (Ver.D) Depending on site

serving 7 to 12 RRUs requirements

In a TMC11H (Ver.D)
serving 7 to 12 RRUs

In a TMC11H (Ver.E)
serving 7 to 21 RRUs

Table 1-22 Installation positions of DCDU-12Bs

Base Station Application Scenario Installation Position

BTS5900A In a cabinet serving 1 1 U space below the

to 6 RRUs in DC BBU in the TMC11H
scenarios

In a cabinet serving 7 1 U space at the top of

to 15 RRUs in DC the RFC
scenarios

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Station Application Scenario Installation Position

DBS5900 In a TMC11H (Ver.E) Depending on site

serving 7 to 21 RRUs requirements

Figure 1-117 Installation positions of DCDU-12Bs

● The following table lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables.

Table 1-23 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables

Base Applicati Wire Color Cross- Connector/

Statio on Sectional Terminal
n Scenario Area
Most One
Regions/UK/ End/The
China Other End

BTS390 AC RTN(+ Black/ 25 mm2 OT terminal

0A ) Blue/Red (0.039 in.2), (M6)/OT
(Ver.D) one group terminal
(M6)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Applicati Wire Color Cross- Connector/

Statio on Sectional Terminal
n Scenario Area
Most One
Regions/UK/ End/The
China Other End

NEG(- Blue/Gray/
) Blue

DC RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
in.2 (low Depending
NEG(- Blue/Gray/ on the
smoke
) Blue external
zero
halogen), equipment
one group
● 16 mm2
or 0.025
in.2, two
groups

BTS390 DC RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

0A ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
(Ver.E) in.2 (low Depending
smoke on the
zero external
halogen), equipment
one group
NEG(- Blue/Gray/ OT terminal
) Blue ● 16 mm2 (M6)/
or 0.025 Depending
in.2, two on the
groups external
equipment

DBS39 In an RTN(+ Black/ 25 mm2 OT terminal

00 APM30H ) Blue/Red (0.039 in.2), (M6)/
(Ver.D) one group Depending
serving 7 NEG(- Blue/Gray/ on the
to 12 ) Blue external
RRUs equipment

● In a RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

TMC1 ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
1H in.2 (low Depending
(Ver.D smoke on the
) zero external
servin halogen), equipment
g 7 to one group
12
● 16 mm2
RRUs
or 0.025

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Applicati Wire Color Cross- Connector/

Statio on Sectional Terminal
n Scenario Area
Most One
Regions/UK/ End/The
China Other End
● In a NEG(- Blue/Gray/ in.2, two
TMC1 ) Blue groups
1H
(Ver.E)
servin
g 7 to
21
RRUs

Table 1-24 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables

Base Applicati Wire Color Cross- Connector/
Statio on Sectional Terminal
n Scenario Area
Most One
Regions/UK/ End/The
China Other End

BTS590 DC RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

0A ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
in.2 (low Depending
smoke on the
zero external
halogen), equipment
one group
NEG(- Blue/Gray/ OT terminal
) Blue ● 16 mm2 (M6)/
or 0.025 Depending
in.2, two on the
groups external
equipment

DBS59 In a RTN(+ Black/ ● 35 mm2 OT terminal

00 TMC11H ) Blue/Red or 0.054 (M6)/
(Ver.E) in.2 (low Depending
serving 7 NEG(- Blue/Gray/ on the
smoke
to 21 ) Blue external
zero
RRUs halogen), equipment
one group
● 16 mm2
or 0.025
in.2, two
groups

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the four M6 screws from both sides of the slot housing the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-118 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of a DCDU-12B

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in the following figure.

1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the
mounting ears on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.
2. Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.70
lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-119 Installing a DCDU-12B

(1) DCDU-12B (2) Cable claw

Step 4 Prepare the DCDU-12B power cable.

1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add connectors to both ends of the cable.

Table 1-25 Connectors for the cable

Base Station Application Power Method of
Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

BTS3900A AC EPU05A-02/04 Add connectors

(Ver.D) to both ends of
the power cable
according to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Station Application Power Method of

Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

BTS3900A DC External power Add new OT

(Ver.D) equipment terminals to one
end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

BTS3900A (Ver.E) DC External power Add new OT

equipment terminals to one
end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

DBS3900 In an APM30H EPU05A-03/05 Add connectors

(Ver.D) serving 7 to both ends of
to 12 RRUs the power cable
according to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.

In a TMC11H External power Add new OT

(Ver.D) serving 7 equipment terminals to one
to 12 RRUs end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Station Application Power Method of

Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

In a TMC11H Connectors at
(Ver.E) serving 7 the other end
to 21 RRUs depend on the
site
requirements.

Table 1-26 Connectors for the cable

Base Station Application Power Method of
Scenario Equipment Adding a
Connector/
Terminal

BTS5900A DC External power Add new OT

equipment terminals to one
end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

DBS5900 In a TMC11H External power Add new OT

(Ver.E) serving 7 equipment terminals to one
to 21 RRUs end of the power
cable according
to the
instructions in
Assembling the
OT Terminal and
the Power Cable.
Connectors at
the other end
depend on the
site
requirements.

Step 5 Install the DCDU-12B power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the protective cover for the terminals of the DC input power cable
from the DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

to the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12B and tighten the screw on the OT
terminal to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
2. Reinstall the protective cover, and use the screwdriver to tighten the screw on
the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cable to the corresponding port on the
power equipment, as described in the following table.

Table 1-27 Cable connections

Base Station Application Power Installation
Scenario Equipment Position

BTS3900A AC EPU05A-02/04 DC output

(Ver.D) terminal "RFC2"
on the EPU in
the APM30H,
requiring a
torque of 4.8
N·m (42.48
lbf·in.)

DC External power Corresponding

equipment port on the
external power
equipment

BTS3900A (Ver.E) DC External power Corresponding

equipment port on the
external power
equipment

DBS3900 In an APM30H EPU05A-03/05 DC output

(Ver.D) serving 7 terminal "RFC1"
to 12 RRUs on the EPU in
the APM30H,
requiring a
torque of 4.8
N·m (42.48
lbf·in.)

In a TMC11H External power Corresponding

(Ver.D) serving 7 equipment port on the
to 12 RRUs external power
equipment
In a TMC11H External power
(Ver.E) serving 7 equipment
to 21 RRUs

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-28 Cable connections

Base Station Application Power Installation
Scenario Equipment Position

BTS5900A DC External power Corresponding

equipment port on the
external power
equipment

DBS5900 In a TMC11H External power Corresponding

(Ver.E) serving 7 equipment port on the
to 21 RRUs external power
equipment

Figure 1-120 Installing DCDU-12B power cables (Ver.D)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-121 Installing DCDU-12B power cables (Ver.E)

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.12.8 Installing PSUs and PDUs

By default, the EPU05A-06/EPU05A-08 or EPU05A-07/EPU05A-09 subrack in an
APM30H (Ver.E) is configured with two PSUs. When power-consuming
components are added, more PSUs must be configured. When an APM30H (Ver.E)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

needs to provide power for more RRUs, install a PDU01D-01 or PDU03D-02 in the
EPU05A-06/EPU05A-08 or EPU05A-07/EPU05A-09 subrack.

Context
Figure 1-122 shows the position for installing a PDU01D-01, PDU03D-02s, and
PSUs in an APM30H (Ver.E).

Figure 1-122 Positions for installing PSUs and PDUs

(1) PSU (R4850G2) (2) PDU01D-01 (3) PDU03D-02

Procedure
● Install the PSUs in the EPU05A-06/EPU05A-08 or EPU05A-07/EPU05A-09.
a. Remove the corresponding filler panels.
b. Release the buckle on the upper left of the PSU, and rotate the handle on
the upper side outwards.
c. Gently slide the PSU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
d. Raise the ejector lever, and fasten the buckle, as shown in Figure 1-123.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-123 Installing a PSU

● Install the PDU01D-01 in the EPU05A-06/EPU05A-08 or EPU05A-07/

EPU05A-09, as shown in Figure 1-124.
a. Remove the corresponding filler panel.
b. Release the buckle on the upper left of the PDU01D-01, and rotate the
handle on the upper side outwards.
c. Gently slide the PDU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
d. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.

Figure 1-124 Installing a PDU01D-01

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● Install the PDU03D-02 in the EPU05A-06/EPU05A-08 or EPU05A-07/

EPU05A-09, as shown in Figure 1-125.
a. Remove the corresponding filler panel.
b. Remove the female fast connector from the PDU03D-02.
c. Release the buckle on the upper left of the PDU03D-02, and rotate the
handle on the upper side outwards.
d. Gently slide the PDU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
e. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.
f. Reinsert the female fast connector removed in b to the PDU03D-02.

Figure 1-125 Installing a PDU03D-02

----End

1.12.9 Installing a DCDU16D

When a base station is configured with high-power RRUs, a DCDU16D is required
to supply power.

Context
NOTE

One DCDU16D can provide power distribution for three RRUs (power consumption per RRU ≤
1400 W).

The following table lists the DCDU16D configuration principles.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-29 Configuration principles

Base Station Cabinet Application Policy

BTS3900A ● TMC11H (Ver.E) Install a DCDU16D.

● TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D)

● APM30H (Ver.E)
● APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

● APM30H (Ver.D)
● APM30H (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H (Ver.D_C)
● TMC11H (Ver.D)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_C)

Table 1-30 Configuration principles

Base Station Cabinet Application Policy

BTS5900A ● TMC11H (Ver.E) Install a DCDU16D.

● APM30H (Ver.E)

● APM30H (Ver.F_B~E) Install two DCDU16Ds.

● TMC11H (Ver.F_B~E)

The following figures show the installation position of the DCDU16D.

Figure 1-126 Installation positions

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-127 Installation positions

Figure 1-128 Installation positions

(1) DCDU16D

The following table lists the specifications of power cables.

NOTE

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-31 Specifications of power cables

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Power
Station Sectional Equipment
Area One End The Other
End

BTS3900A ● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-06

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-08
● APM30 groups
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-02

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.D) 2), one (M6) (M6) EPU05A-04
● APM30 group
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● APM30
H
(Ver.D_C
)

● TMC11 25 mm2 OT Depending External

H (0.039 in. terminal on the power
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) external equipment
● TMC11 groups equipment
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_C
)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-32 Specifications of power cables

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Power

Station Sectional Equipment
Area One End The Other
End

BTS5900A APM30H 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-06

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-08
groups

TMC11H 25 mm2 OT Depending External

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal on the power
2), two (M6) external equipment
groups equipment

APM30H 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-11

(Ver.F_B~E) (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-12
groups

TMC11H 25 mm2 OT Depending External

(Ver.F_B~E) (0.039 in. terminal on the power
2), two (M6) external equipment
groups equipment

Procedure
Step 1 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU16D, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-129 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU16D

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 2 Gently slide the DCDU16D into the installation position along the guide rails.
Then, use a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

on both sides of the DCDU16D to the recommended 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as

shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-130 Installing a DCDU16D

Step 3 Prepare DCDU16D power cables.

1. Measure the distance between the EPU02D-02 and the external power
equipment based on the actual cable route, and cut the cable to suit the
actual cable route.
2. Add an M6 OT terminal to one end of the power cable according to the
instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable, and add a
connector to the other end of the power cable depending on the external
power equipment.

DANGER

Do not expose the metal wire when preparing the power cable, as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 1-131 Adding an OT terminal to a power cable

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 4 Install DCDU16D input power cables.

1. Add OT terminals to the power cables on the DCDU16D side according to the
instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
connector at the other end depends on site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the DCDU16D, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-132 Installing DCDU16D input power cables

Step 5 In an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_C), or APM30H (Ver.D_B), connect the

other end of the DCDU16D input power cables to the RFC1 or RFC2 power supply
port on the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, or EPU05A-05, as shown in the
following figure. Then, tighten the connector to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-133 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04,

or EPU05A-05

Step 6 In an APM30H (Ver.E) or APM30H (Ver.E_B~D), PDU01D-01s are required in slots

8 and 9 on the EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09. Connect the
other end of the DCDU16D input power cables to the PDU01D-01s, as shown in
the following figure. Then, tighten the connector to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-134 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08,

or EPU05A-09

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 7 Install the DCDU16D input power cables in the TMC11H (Ver.F_B~E).
1. Add OT terminals to the power cables on the DCDU16D side according to the
instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
connector at the other end depends on site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the DCDU16D, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover on the DCDU16D, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-135 Installing DCDU16D input power cables

Step 8 In an APM30H (Ver.F_B~E), PDU01D-02s are required in slots 9 and 10 on the

EPU05A-11 or EPU05A-12. Connect the other end of the DCDU16D input power
cables to the PDU01D-02s, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-136 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-11 or EPU05A-12

Step 9 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 10 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.12.10 Installing an EPU02D/EPU02D-02

When a base station is configured with high-power RRUs and requires voltage
boosting power distribution, an EPU02D or EPU02D-02 must be installed.

Context
NOTE

● An EPU02D/EPU02D-02 can be configured with a maximum of two BDU65-03s (shortened

to BDU in this section).
● An EPU02D can provide voltage boosting power distribution for six RRUs (power
consumption per RRU ≤ 800 W).
● An EPU02D-02 can provide voltage boosting power distribution for three RRUs (power
consumption per RRU ≤ 1200 W).
● The EPU02D and EPU02D-02 installation methods are the same. This section uses the
EPU02D-02 as an example.

The following table lists the EPU02D or EPU02D-02 configuration principles.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-33 Configuration principles

Base Station Type Cabinet Application Policy

BTS3900A ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D) EPU02D-02 is installed.

● APM30H (Ver.E)
● APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

● APM30H (Ver.D)
● APM30H (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H (Ver.D_C)
● TMC11H (Ver.D)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_C)

DBS3900 ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D) EPU02D-02 is installed.

● APM30H (Ver.E)
● APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

● TMC11H (Ver.D)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H (Ver.D_C)

● APM30H (Ver.D)
● APM30H (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H (Ver.D_C)

Table 1-34 Configuration principles

Base Station Type Cabinet Application Policy

BTS5900A ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● APM30H (Ver.E) EPU02D-02 is installed.

DBS5900 ● TMC11H (Ver.E) One EPU02D or

● APM30H (Ver.E) EPU02D-02 is installed.

The following figures show installation positions.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-137 Installation positions

Figure 1-138 Installation positions

The following table lists the specifications of power cables.

NOTE

Table 1-35 Power cable specifications

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

BTS3900A ● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-06

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-08
● APM30 groups
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-02

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.D) 2), one (M6) (M6) EPU05A-04
● APM30 group
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● APM30
H
(Ver.D_C
)

● TMC11 25 mm2 OT Depending External

H (0.039 in. terminal on the power
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) external equipment
● TMC11 groups equipment
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_C
)

DBS3900 ● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-07

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-09
● APM30 groups
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

● APM30 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-03

H (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
(Ver.D) 2), one (M6) (M6) EPU05A-05
● APM30 group
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● APM30
H
(Ver.D_C
)

● TMC11 25 mm2 OT Depending External

H (0.039 in. terminal on the power
(Ver.E) 2), two (M6) external equipment
● TMC11 groups equipment
H
(Ver.E_B
~D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_B
)
● TMC11
H
(Ver.D_C
)

Table 1-36 Power cable specifications

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power
Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

BTS5900A APM30H 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-06

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-08
groups

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Cross- Connector Type Power

Station Type Sectional Equipment
Type Area One End The Other
End

TMC11H 25 mm2 OT Depending External

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal on the power
2), two (M6) external equipment
groups equipment

DBS5900 APM30H 25 mm2 OT OT EPU05A-07

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal terminal /
2), two (M6) (M6) EPU05A-09
groups

TMC11H 25 mm2 OT Depending External

(Ver.E) (0.039 in. terminal on the power
2), two (M6) external equipment
groups equipment

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: After an EPU02D-02 is installed, remove the DCDU that is not in use.
1. Turn off the circuit breaker of the equipment supplying power for the DCDU.
2. Record all cable connections on the DCDU, and remove the cables.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from both sides of
the DCDU, and gently pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
4. Place the removed DCDU in an ESD box or bag.

Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02D-02, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-139 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of an EPU02D-02

(1) Double-sided tape

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Put the EPU02D-02 into the installation position. Then, use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears on both sides of the EPU02D-02
with the recommended torque of 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-140 Installing an EPU02D-02

Step 4 Optional: Install the second BDU in slot 2 of the EPU02D-02 as required.
NOTE

An EPU02D-02 has been configured with two BDUs before delivery. Therefore, skip this step for
an EPU02D-02.
1. Remove the corresponding filler panel.
2. Release the buckle on the upper right corner of the BDU, and rotate the
handle outwards.
3. Gently slide the BDU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
4. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.

Figure 1-141 Installing a BDU

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 5 Install EPU02D-02 input power cables.

1. Add OT terminals to one end of the cables on the EPU02D-02 side according
to the instructions in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
connector at the other end depends on site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the EPU02D-02, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals on the EPU02D-02. Use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover of the EPU02D-02, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-142 Installing EPU02D-02 input power cables

NOTE

– Add OT terminals to the power cables according to the instructions in Assembling the
OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
– The cable diagram on the top of the EPU02D/EPU02D-02 protection cover is used for
preparing an output power cable connected to an EPC4/EPC5/EPC11 connector.

Step 6 Optional: In the APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_C), or APM30H (Ver.D_B),

connect the other end of the EPU02D input power cables to the RFC1 or RFC2

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

power supply port on the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, or EPU05A-05, as

shown in the following figure. Then, tighten the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48
lbf·in.).

Figure 1-143 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04,

or EPU05A-05

Step 7 Optional: In the APM30H (Ver.E), configure the PDU01D-01 in slots 8 and 9 in the
EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 and connect the EPU02D input
power cables to the PDU01D-01, as shown in the following figure. Then, tighten
the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-144 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08,

or EPU05A-09

Step 8 Optional: Install the EPU02D-02 alarm cable, as shown in the following figure.

Table 1-37 Installing the alarm cable

Installatio One End The Other End Illustratio
n Scenario n
Installatio Connector Installation Connect
n Position Position or

Connected COM_IN RJ45 ● MON1-0/ RJ45 Figure

to the BBU port on the connector D_COM1- connecto 1-145
of EPU02D 0 port on r
SRAN12.1 the FAN
or a later 02E
version ● MON1-0/
D_COM1-
0 port on
the
FAN02H

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Installatio One End The Other End Illustratio

n Scenario n
Installatio Connector Installation Connect
n Position Position or

Connected ALM_ALL White and EXT_ALM0 or RJ45 Figure

to the BBU port on the orange EXT_ALM1 connecto 1-146
of EPU02D bare wire port on the r
SRAN12.0 BBU
or an
earlier
version

Connected ALM_ALL White and Depending Dependi -

to external port on the orange on the ng on
monitoring EPU02D bare wire external the
devices equipment external
equipme
nt

NOTE

The types and installation positions of the cables installed on the FAN02H are similar to
those of cables installed on the FAN 02E. The following figures use the FAN 02E as an
example.

Figure 1-145 Installing the alarm cable (SRAN12.1 or later)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-146 Installing the alarm cable (SRAN12.0 or earlier)

Step 9 Optional: When the monitoring port on the fan assembly is occupied, connect the
RJ45 connector at one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the EPU02D-02,
and the RJ45 connector at the other end to the "MON1" port on the BBU, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-147 Installing the alarm cable

Step 10 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 11 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.12.11 Installing an EPU02B/EPU02S

When high-power RRUs are configured and voltage boosting power distribution is
required, an EPU02B or EPU02S can be installed in a 19-inch rack.

Context
● An EPU02B can be configured with a maximum of two BDU70-03s.
● An EPU02S can be configured with a maximum of two dynamic voltage
boosting SDU60-02s.
● One EPU02B can provide voltage boosting power distribution for six RRUs
(power consumption per RRU < 1200 W).
● One EPU02S can provide voltage boosting power distribution for three RRUs
(power consumption per RRU ≤ 1400 W).
NOTE

A BDU refers to a BDU70-03 and an SDU refers to an SDU60-02 in this section.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

For the configuration principles of the EPU02B, see EPU02B. For the configuration
principles of the EPU02S, see EPU02S.
The following figure shows the installation positions of an EPU02B/EPU02S.

Figure 1-148 Installation positions of the power distribution box in 3900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02B/EPU02S

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-149 Installation positions of the power distribution box in 5900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02B/EPU02S

The following table lists the specifications of EPU02B/EPU02S power cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-38 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 3900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Connector Power
Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

BTS390 ● BTS3900 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 (Ver.D) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900 in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_A~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS390 ● BTS3900L OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0L (Ver.D) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900L in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

● BTS3 ● APM30H OT terminal (M6, OT terminal EPU05A-02/0

900A (Ver.D) 25 mm2 or 0.039 (M6) 4
● DBS3 ● APM30H in.2 for one group)
900 (Ver.D_B)
● APM30H
(Ver.D_C)

● TMC11H OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

(Ver.F_B~E) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● TMC11H in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E) or 25 mm2 or
● TMC11H 0.039 in.2 for two
(Ver.E_B~D) groups)
● TMC11H
(Ver.D)
● TMC11H
(Ver.D_B)
● TMC11H
(Ver.D_C)

DBS390 OMB (Ver.C) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 16 mm2 or 0.025 the external power
in.2 for two equipment equipment
groups)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Connector Power

Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

IMB03 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

IMB05 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

INS12 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

depending on the the external power
external equipment equipment
equipment)

ILC29 (Ver.E) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS390 BTS3900AL OT terminal (M6, Depending on ETP48400 or

0AL 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external external
in.2 for one group equipment power
or 25 mm2 or equipment
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-39 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 5900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Connector Power
Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

BTS590 ● BTS5900 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 (Ver.A) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900 in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_A~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS590 ● BTS5900L OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0L (Ver.A) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
● BTS3900L in.2 for one group equipment equipment
(Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

BTS590 ● TMC11H OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0A (Ver.F_B~E) 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
DBS590 ● TMC11H in.2 for one group equipment equipment
0 (Ver.E_B~D) or 25 mm2 or
● TMC11H 0.039 in.2 for two
(Ver.E) groups)

DBS590 IMB05 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

0 35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

INS12 OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

depending on the the external power
external equipment equipment
equipment)

ILC29 (Ver.E) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Connector Power

Station Equipment
Type One End The Other
End

APM5930(DC) OT terminal (M6, Depending on External

35 mm2 or 0.054 the external power
in.2 for one group equipment equipment
or 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2 for two
groups)

NOTE

● In most regions except the UK and China, the RTN(+) cable is black and the NEG(-)
cable is blue.
● In the UK, the RTN(+) cable is blue and the NEG(-) cable is gray.
● In China, the RTN(+) cable is red and the NEG(-) cable is blue.

Procedure
Step 1 After an EPU02B/EPU02S is installed, remove the DCDU that is not in use.
1. Turn off the circuit breaker of the equipment supplying power to the DCDU.
2. Record all cable connections on the DCDU, and remove the cables.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from both sides of
the DCDU, and gently pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
4. Place the removed DCDU in an ESD box or bag.
Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02B/EPU02S, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-150 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02B

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-151 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02S

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 3 Place the EPU02B/EPU02S at the installation position. Then, use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears on both sides with
the recommended torque of 2 N·m or 17.70 lbf·in. (EPU02B)/3 N·m or 26.55 lbf·in.
(EPU02S), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-152 Installing an EPU02B

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-153 Installing an EPU02S

Step 4 If a second BDU is required, install the second BDU in slot 2 of the EPU02B as
required.
1. Remove the filler panel from slot 2 of the EPU02B.
2. Release the buckle on the upper right corner of the BDU, and rotate the
handle outwards.
3. Gently slide the BDU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
4. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.

Figure 1-154 Installing a BDU

Step 5 Install input power cables of the EPU02B/EPU02S.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Prepare OT terminals on the EPU02B/EPU02S side by referring to Assembling

the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The connector at the other end
depends on site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the EPU02B/EPU02S, and then remove the
protective cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals of the EPU02B/EPU02S, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M6 screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the EPU02B/EPU02S protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver
to tighten the M3 screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-155 Installing input power cables of the EPU02B

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-156 Installing input power cables of the EPU02S

Step 6 In an APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.D_C)/APM30H (Ver.D_B), connect the other

end of the EPU02B/EPU02S input power cables to the RFC1 or RFC2 power supply
port on the EPU05A-02/03/04/05 with a torque of 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as
shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-157 Installing EPU02B power cables to the EPU05A-02/03/04/05

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-158 Installing EPU02S power cables to the EPU05A-02/03/04/05

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 8 Attach labels to the installed cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Cable-Tying Label.

----End

1.12.12 Installing a BDU70-03/SDU60-02

This section describes the method for installing a BDU70-03/SDU60-02.

Context
● Only one BDU70–03 has been installed in the EPU02B before delivery. The
second BDU70–03 can be installed onsite.
● Two SDU60–02 modules have been installed in the EPU02S before delivery.
Therefore, you do not need to install any SDU60–02.
● The BDU70–03/SDU60–02 can also be installed in the EPU05A subrack in an
APM5930(AC)/APM30H (Ver.F_B~E)/APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)/APM30H (Ver.E).
NOTE

The EPU05A-06/EPU05A-07/EPU05A-08/EPU05A-09 is used in an APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)/

APM30H (Ver.E), and the EPU05A-11/EPU05A-12 is used in an APM5930(AC)/APM30H
(Ver.F_B~E).

The following figure shows the installation positions of the BDU70-03/SDU60-02

modules.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-159 Installation positions of BDU70-03/SDU60-02 modules

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

(1) Installation position of a BDU70-03/SDU60-02

The following tables describe configuration principles for the BDU70-03/SDU60-02

in different cabinets.

Table 1-40 BDU70-03 configuration principles

Cabinet Type Power Subrack Maximum Configuration

Number of Principle
Voltage Boosting
Power Outputs

● APM30H EPU05A-06/ 3 One BDU70-03

(Ver.E) EPU05A-07/
● APM30H EPU05A-08/
(Ver.E_B~D) EPU05A-09

APM30H EPU05A-11/ 6 Two BDU70-03

(Ver.F_B~E) EPU05A-12 modules

APM5930(DC) EPU05A-11/ 6 Two BDU70-03

EPU05A-12 modules

Table 1-41 SDU60-02 configuration principles

Cabinet Type Power Subrack Maximum Configuration

Number of Principle
Voltage Boosting
Power Outputs

● APM30H EPU05A-06/ 3 Two SDU60-02

(Ver.E) EPU05A-07/ modules
● APM30H EPU05A-08/
(Ver.E_B~D) EPU05A-09

APM30H EPU05A-11/ 6 Three SDU60-02

(Ver.F_B~E) EPU05A-12 modules

APM5930(DC) EPU05A-11/ 6 Three SDU60-02

EPU05A-12 modules

Procedure
Step 1 Install a BDU in slot 2 of the EPU02B.
1. Remove the filler panel from slot 2 of the EPU02B.
2. Release the buckle on the upper right corner of the BDU, and rotate the
handle outwards.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Gently slide the BDU into the corresponding slot along the guide rails.
4. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.

Figure 1-160 Installing a BDU

Step 2 Install a BDU70-03/SDU60-02 in an APM5930(AC)/APM30H (Ver.F_B~E)/APM30H

(Ver.E_B~D)/APM30H (Ver.E).
1. Remove the filler panel from the corresponding slot in the EPU05A-11/
EPU05A-12.
2. Release the buckle on the upper right corner of the BDU70-03/SDU60-02, and
rotate the handle outwards.
3. Gently slide the BDU70-03/SDU60-02 into the corresponding slot along the
guide rails.
4. Rotate the handle inwards, and fasten the buckle.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-161 Installing a BDU70-03

Figure 1-162 Installing an SDU60-02

----End

1.12.13 Installing an EPU02S-02

When a base station is configured with high-power RRUs and requires voltage
boosting power distribution, an EPU02S-02 must be installed.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
NOTE

● An EPU02S-02 supports only one SDU60-02 and one SDU30-01. Both SDU60-02 and
SDU30-01 are dynamic voltage boosting modules.
● One EPU02S-02 can provide voltage boosting power distribution for three RRUs (power
consumption per RRU ≤ 1400 W).

For details about the configuration principles of the EPU02S-02, see EPU02S-02.
The following figures show installation positions.

Figure 1-163 Installation positions of the power distribution boxes in 3900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02S-02

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-164 Installation positions of the power distribution boxes in 5900 series
base stations

(1) Installation position of an EPU02S-02

The following tables list the specifications of power cables.

NOTE

● In most regions, the RTN(+) cable is black and the NEG(-) cable is blue.
● In the UK, the RTN(+) cable is blue and the NEG(-) cable is gray.
● In China, the RTN(+) cable is red and the NEG(-) cable is blue.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-42 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 3900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Cross- Connector Type Power
Statio Sectional Equipment
n Type Area One End The Other
End

BTS390 ● BTS3900 ● Two OT Depending External

0 (Ver.D) groups of terminal on the power
● BTS3900 25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(Ver.E_A~D (0.039 in. equipment
2) power
)
cables
● One group
of 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) power

cables

BTS390 ● BTS3900L ● Two OT Depending External

0L (Ver.D) groups of terminal on the power
● BTS3900L 25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(Ver.E_B~D (0.039 in. equipment
2) power
)
cables
● One group
of 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) power

cables

● BTS ● APM30H One group of OT OT EPU05A-02/

390 (Ver.D) 25 mm2 terminal terminal EPU05A-04
0A ● APM30H (0.039 in.2) (M6) (M6)
● DBS (Ver.D_B) cables
390 ● APM30H
0 (Ver.D_C)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Cross- Connector Type Power

Statio Sectional Equipment
n Type Area One End The Other
End

● TMC11H ● Two OT Depending External

(Ver.F_B~E) groups of terminal on the power
● TMC11H 25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(Ver.E) (0.039 in. equipment
2) power
● TMC11H
cables
(Ver.E_B~D
) ● One group
of 35
● TMC11H
(Ver.D) mm2
(0.054 in.
● TMC11H 2) power
(Ver.D_B)
cables
● TMC11H
(Ver.D_C)

DBS39 IMB03 ● Two OT Depending External

00 groups of terminal on the power
25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(0.039 in. equipment
2) power

cables
● One group
of 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) power

cables

IMB05 ● Two OT Depending External

groups of terminal on the power
25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(0.039 in. equipment
2) power

cables
● One group
of 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) power

cables

INS12 Depending OT Depending External

on the terminal on the power
external (M6) external equipment
equipment equipment

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Cross- Connector Type Power

Statio Sectional Equipment
n Type Area One End The Other
End

ILC29 (Ver.E) ● Two OT Depending External

groups of terminal on the power
25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(0.039 in. equipment
2) power

cables
● One group
of 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) power

cables

BTS390 BTS3900AL ● Two OT Depending ETP48400 or

0AL groups of terminal on the external
25 mm2 (M6) external power
(0.039 in. equipment equipment
2) power

cables
● One group
of 35
mm2
(0.054 in.
2) power

cables

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-43 Specifications of power cables for the power distribution box in 5900
series base stations
Base Cabinet Type Cross- Connector Type Power
Statio Sectional Equipment
n Area One End The Other
Type End

BTS59 ● BTS5900 ● Two OT Depending External

00 (Ver.A) groups of terminal on the power
● BTS3900 25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(Ver.E_A~D (0.039 in.2) equipment
) power
cables
● One group
of 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2)
power
cables

BTS59 ● BTS5900L ● Two OT Depending External

00L (Ver.A) groups of terminal on the power
● BTS3900L 25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(Ver.E_B~D (0.039 in.2) equipment
) power
cables
● One group
of 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2)
power
cables

BTS59 ● TMC11H ● Two OT Depending External

00A (Ver.F_B~E) groups of terminal on the power
DBS5 ● TMC11H 25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
900 (Ver.E_B~D (0.039 in.2) equipment
) power
cables
● TMC11H
(Ver.E) ● One group
of 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2)
power
cables

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Cabinet Type Cross- Connector Type Power

Statio Sectional Equipment
n Area One End The Other
Type End

DBS5 IMB05 ● Two OT Depending External

900 groups of terminal on the power
25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(0.039 in.2) equipment
power
cables
● One group
of 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2)
power
cables

INS12 Depending on OT Depending External

the external terminal on the power
equipment (M6) external equipment
equipment

ILC29 (Ver.E) ● Two OT Depending External

groups of terminal on the power
25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(0.039 in.2) equipment
power
cables
● One group
of 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2)
power
cables

APM5930(DC) ● Two OT Depending External

groups of terminal on the power
25 mm2 (M6) external equipment
(0.039 in.2) equipment
power
cables
● One group
of 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2)
power
cables

Procedure
Step 1 After an EPU02S-02 is installed, remove the DCDU that is not in use.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Turn off the circuit breaker of the equipment supplying power for the DCDU.
2. Record all cable connections on the DCDU, and remove the cables.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from both sides of
the DCDU, and gently pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails.
4. Place the removed DCDU in an ESD box or bag.

Step 2 Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02S-02, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-165 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the EPU02S-02

(1) Double-sided tape

Step 3 Gently slide the EPU02S-02 into the installation position along the guide rails.
Then, use a torque screwdriver to tighten the four M6x12 screws of mounting ears
on both sides with the recommended torque of 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 1-166 Installing an EPU02S-02

Step 4 Install input power cables of the EPU02S-02.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Prepare OT terminals on the EPU02S-02 side by referring to Assembling the

OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The connector at the other end depends on
site requirements.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen one M3 screw on the protective cover for
the wiring terminal block on the EPU02S-02, and then remove the protective
cover.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and
NEG(-) terminals of the EPU02S-02, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten
the M6 screw to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the M3
screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
5. Connect the other end of the power cables to the corresponding port on the
power equipment.

Figure 1-167 Installing input power cables of the EPU02S-02

Step 5 Optional: In an APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.D_C)/APM30H (Ver.D_B), connect

the other end of the EPU02S-02 input power cables to the RFC1 or RFC2 power
supply port on the EPU05A-02/03/04/05 with a torque of 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.),
as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-168 Installing power cables to the EPU05A-02/03/04/05

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 7 Attach labels to the installed cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Cable-Tying Label.

----End

1.12.14 Installing the ODM06D

An ODM06D is required to provide power for RRUs. The ODM06D can be installed
on a mounting frame or pole.

1.12.14.1 Installing the ODM06D on a Pole

This section describes how to install the ODM06D on an outdoor pole.

Context
NOTE

● The diameter of a metal pole for installing an ODM06D should range from 48 mm to 114
mm (1.89 in. to 4.49 in.).
● The maximum distance between the pole and the APM30H is 2.5 m (98.43 in.). The
maximum length of the power cable between the ODM06D and the APM30H is 6 m (236.22
in.).

An ODM06D is installed with the ports at the bottom, as shown in the following
figure

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-169 Correct installation of an ODM06D

Procedure
Step 1 Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D to 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-170 Installing mounting ears

Step 2 Put the hose clamp through the holes in the middle of the mounting kit.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Place the ODM06D to the installation position, circle the hose clamp around the
pole, put the steel strip of the hose clamp through the locking head (as shown by
illustration 1 in the following figure), press the screw on a proper position to
partially tighten it, and use an M6 inner hexagon screwdriver to tighten the screw
to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

When tightening the hose clamp, you need to be close to the ODM06D to prevent the ODM06D
from falling.

Figure 1-171 Securing the ODM06D

----End

1.12.14.2 Installing the ODM06D on a Mounting Frame

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the ODM06D
on the mounting frame on the cabinet side.

Context
● An ODM06D mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet,
or two ODM06D mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked
cabinets or both sides of a single cabinet. The method of installing ODM06D

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

mounting frames depends on the site space and the number of ODM06Ds to
be installed.
● An ODM06D mounting frame or two ODM06D mounting frames are
preferentially installed on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked
cabinets. If one or two ODM06D mounting frames are installed on the left
side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets, only one ODM06D can be
installed on one of the two ODM06D mounting frames.
● When the mounting frames are installed on the left side of the cabinets and
two modules are installed side by side on the mounting frames, the angle of
the opened cabinet door cannot exceed 90°.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-172 Installing a mounting kit on the top

Step 2 Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use
a torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.28 lbf·in.), as shown in
the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-173 Installing a mounting kit on the top

Step 3 Place the ODM06D mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two
M6x14 screws to secure the mounting frame onto the mounting kit on the top to
5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-174 Securing an ODM06D mounting frame to one side of the cabinet

NOTE

If two ODM06D mounting frames need to be installed on both sides of a single cabinet, the
second ODM06D mounting frame is installed on the other side of the cabinet.

Step 4 Optional: When cabinets are stacked, install a mounting frame on the lower
cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
1. Install the mechanical parts for jointing the upper and lower ODM06D
mounting frames onto the upper ODM06D mounting frame. Tighten four
M6x14 screws to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.).
2. Attach the second ODM06D mounting frame to the installed ODM06D
mounting frame. Tighten four M6x14 screws to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-175 Installing mechanical parts

Step 5 Install the attachment plates for the mounting frame at the bottom of the
cabinet. As listed in the following table, the installation procedure varies according
to the cabinet type.

If... Then...

● Scenario where a base for a Ver.A Step 6

cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.B
cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.C
cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.D
cabinet is used
● Scenario where a base for a Ver.E
cabinet is used

● Scenario where a base complying Step 7

with the American standard is
used
● Scenario where a base (with small
cable holes) complying with the
UK standard is used
● Scenario where a base (with large
cable holes) complying with the
UK standard is used

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Optional: Install attachment plates for the mounting frames of bases for Ver.D,
Ver.A, Ver.B, Ver.C, and Ver.E cabinets.
1. Use five M6x14 screws to secure the attachment plate to the bottom of the
ODM06D mounting frame to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-176 Installing the attachment plates for bases of Ver.A/Ver.B/Ver.C/

Ver.D/Ver.E cabinets

2. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D attachment plate to the rear
of the base for the cabinet to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure. Skip this step in the scenario where a base for a Ver.A cabinet is used.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-177 Installing the attachment plates for bases of Ver.B/Ver.C/Ver.D/

Ver.E cabinets

Step 7 Optional: Install the UK-standard or American-standard attachment plates.

1. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the attachment plate to the bottom of the
ODM06D mounting frame to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-178 Installing the attachment plates for bases of UK-standard or

American-standard (1)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

2. Remove two screws from the cable hole, align the attachment plate with the
position where screws were installed, use four M6x14 screws to tighten the
attachment plate to 5 N·m (44.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-179 Installing the attachment plates for bases of UK-standard or

American-standard (2)

(1) Scenario where a (2) Scenario where a (3) Scenario where a

base complying with the base (with small cable base (with large cable
American standard is holes) complying with holes) complying with
used the UK standard is used the UK standard is used

Step 8 Install the ODM06D.

1. Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D to 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-180 Installing mounting ears

2. Place the ODM06D on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D

mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

– If the ODM06D mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, the
ODM06D can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.
– If the ODM06D mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the
ODM06D can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.

Figure 1-181 Pre-securing the ODM06D

(1) Pre-securing part

3. Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D onto the ODM06D mounting
frame to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.). This is a recommended tightening torque.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-182 Securing the ODM06D

----End

1.12.14.3 Installing a PGND Cable for an ODM06D

A PGND cable connects an ODM06D and an external ground bar to ensure proper
grounding of the cabinet.

Context
The following table lists the specifications of the PGND cable for an ODM06D.

Table 1-44 Specifications of a PGND cable

Cable Application Cross-Sectional Color

Scenario Area of the Cable
and Size of the OT
Terminal

PGND ODM06D OT terminal (M6) at Green and yellow

cable one end connecting
to a cable with a
cross-sectional area
of 16 mm2 (0.025
in.2) and cord end
terminal at the
other end

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a PGND cable.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add an OT terminal and a cord end terminal at the ends of a PGND cable
according to the instructions in Installing the Cord End Terminal and Installing
the OT Terminal.
Step 2 Install the PGND cable for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Partially loosen the bolt on the PG connector for the PGND cable so that a
cable can go through the PG connector.
2. Route the PGND cable for the ODM06D through the PG connector.
3. Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminal onto the
terminal block to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.), which is a recommended torque.
4. Use the cable clip to secure the cable and tighten the M4 screw on the cable
clip to 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.) to ensure that the cable clip closely contacts
with the shield layer of the cable. The 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.) value is a
recommended torque.
5. Secure the PG connector of the cable.

NOTICE

Tighten the PG connector to protect the device from water damage.

Figure 1-183 Installing the PGND cable for an ODM06D

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Connect the other end of the PGND cable for the ODM06D to the external ground
bar.

----End

1.12.15 Installing a BBU

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a BBU.

Context
An APM30H, TMC11H, APM5930(AC), or APM5930(DC) can house a maximum of
two BBUs. The second BBU is optional. It can be a BBU3900, BBU3910, or
BBU5900 in an APM30H or TMC11H, and it can be a BBU3910 or BBU5900 in an
APM5930(AC) or APM5930(DC).

1.12.15.1 Installing a BBU3900 or BBU3910

When the site is configured with RFUs and RRUs, one additional BBU and its
cables must be installed.

Context
The following table lists the positions for installing BBUs in the cabinets used by
the BTS3900A. The following figures show these positions.

Table 1-45 BBU installation positions

Base Station Type Installation Position

BTS3900A (Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C) The second BBU (BBU 1) is installed in

the second APM30H or TMC11H, and
the installation position is the same as
the first BBU (BBU 0) in the first
APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in
Figure 1-184.

BTS3900A (Ver.D) or BTS3900A (Ver.E) The second BBU (BBU 1) is installed in

the 2 U space below the first BBU
(BBU 0) in the basic cabinet.
Otherwise, the second BBU (BBU 1) is
installed in the extension cabinet, and
the installation position is the same as
the first BBU (BBU 0) in the first
cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-185.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-184 BBUs installed in the cabinets used by the BTS3900A (Ver.B) or
BTS3900A (Ver.C)

(1) The BBU is installed in the APM30H. (2) The BBU is installed in the TMC11H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-185 BBUs installed in the cabinets used by the BTS3900A (Ver.D) or
BTS3900A (Ver.E)

(1) Both BBUs are installed in the APM30H. (2) Two BBUs are separately installed in the
two APM30Hs.

(3) Both BBUs are installed in the TMC11H. (4) Two BBUs are separately installed in the
two TMC11Hs.

NOTE

● The BBU case has a left-in-right-out ventilation channel. It can be stacked with a device
using a left-in-right-out ventilation channel but cannot be stacked with a device using a
right-in-left-out ventilation channel.
● For an indoor application, the BBU case can be installed in a standardized indoor equipment
room but cannot be installed in an equipment room using direct ventilation.
● For an outdoor application, the BBU case can be installed in a cabinet using a heat
exchanger but cannot be installed in a cabinet using direct ventilation. For the specific
cabinet types, see the related hardware documentation.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform required operations according to the type of a cabinet.

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) or TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H Go to Step 2.

(Ver.C)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

If... Then...

APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H Go to Step 3.

(Ver.E)

Figure 1-186 Removing the filler module

Step 3 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-187 Removing the air baffle

Step 4 Optional: Install cable claws for the BBU in the APM30H or TMC11H.
Align cable claws with the holes on each side of the BBU. Then use two M4 screws
to secure the cable claws to the BBU and tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62
lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-188 Installing cable claws on the BBU

Step 5 Slide the BBU into the cabinet, and tighten the four M6x12 screws on the BBU
panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTICE

When installing a BBU equipped with boards, hold the bottom of the BBU with
your hands and slide it into the cabinet slowly to prevent it from falling.

Figure 1-189 Installing the BBU

Step 6 Prepare a BBU power cable.

1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. According to the cabinet type and power equipment type, add a connector to
the BBU power cable on the power equipment side. The following table
describes how to add a connector to the BBU power cable.

Table 1-46 Method of adding a connector to the BBU power cable

Base Station Type Power Equipment Method of Adding a

Connector

BTS3900A (Ver.B) EPS 01A/EPS 01C Add a female fast

connector (pressfit
type) to the BBU power
cable according to the
instructions in
Assembling the Female
Fast Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the Power
Cable (1).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Station Type Power Equipment Method of Adding a

Connector

DCDU-03C Add an OT terminal to

each end of the BBU
power cable according
to the instructions in
Assembling the OT
Terminal and the
Power Cable.a

BTS3900A (Ver.C) – EPU03A-02/ Add a female fast

EPU03A-04 connector (pressfit
– DCDU-11C type) to the BBU power
cable according to the
instructions in
Assembling the Female
Fast Connector (Pressfit
Type) and the Power
Cable (1).

BTS3900A (Ver.D) – EPU05A-02/ Add an EPC4 connector

EPU05A-04 to one end of the BBU
– EPU02D-02 power cable according
to the instructions in
– DCDU-12C Assembling the EPC4
– DCDU16D Connector and the
Power Cable.
BTS3900A (Ver.E) – EPU05A-06/
EPU05A-08
– EPU02D-02
– DCDU-12C
– DCDU16D

a: Use the OT terminal bent by 90 degrees and delivered with the

DCDU-03C.

Step 7 Install the BBU power cables, as shown in the following figure.

CAUTION

When installing a BBU power cable for a running base station, connect the cable
to the BBU before connecting it to the power equipment. The operations in the
reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

● In most regions except UK and China, the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wires are black and blue,
respectively.
● In UK, the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wires are blue and gray, respectively.
● In China, the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wires are red and blue, respectively.
1. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the "-48V"
port on the UPEU. Then tighten the screws on the connector to 0.6 N·m (5.31
lbf·in.).
2. Connect the other end of the BBU power cable to the corresponding power
equipment, as described in the following table.

Table 1-47 Connectors on BBU power cables

Base Station Cabinet Type Power Installation
Type Equipment Position

BTS3900A APM30H (Ver.B) EPS 01A/EPS 01C "LOAD1" or

(Ver.B) "LOAD2"

TMC11H (Ver.B) DCDU-03C "LOAD6"

Figure 1-190 Installing the BBU power cables in the cabinets used by the
BTS3900A

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 8 Install BBU interconnection signal cables, as listed in the following table.

Table 1-48 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables

Base Station Type Installation Method

BTS3900A (Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C) (Optional) Installing BBU

Interconnection Signal Cables

BTS3900A (Ver.D) or BTS3900A (Ver.E) (Optional) Installing BBU

Interconnection Signal Cables

Step 9 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 10 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.12.15.2 Installing a BBU5900

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a second BBU.

Context
When the site is configured with an APM30H, TMC11H, APM5930(AC), or
APM5930(DC), a maximum of two BBUs can be installed. The following figure
shows the positions for installing the two BBUs.
NOTE

● BBU 0 is mandatory, and BBU 1 is optional.

● When two BBUs are installed in a cabinet, BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space below BBU 0.
The two BBUs must be installed in consecutive order. No vacant slot or equipment is allowed
between the two BBUs.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-191 Positions for installing BBUs in cabinets

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If there is an air baffle in the installation position, remove the air baffle,
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-192 Removing the air baffle

Step 2 Optional: When cable claws are not required onsite, align the BBU mounting ears
with the mounting holes, slide the BBU along the guide rails into the cabinet, and
tighten the four M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following
figure.
NOTE

Cable claws for the BBU5900 are optional based on site requirements.

Figure 1-193 Installing a BBU5900 (without cable claws)

Step 3 Optional: When cable claws are required onsite, align the BBU mounting ears and
cable claws with the mounting holes, slide the BBU along the guide rails into the
cabinet, and tighten the four M6 screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-194 Installing a BBU5900 (with cable claws)

Step 4 Optional: In most cases, an HDEPC connector has been added to one end of the
BBU power cables before delivery. Connectors must be added to the other end of
the cables on the power equipment side onsite. If an HDEPC connector needs to
be added onsite, see the instructions in Assembling the HDEPC Connector and
Power Cables.
Step 5 Connect the HDEPC connector at one end of the BBU power cables to the UPEU in
the BBU5900.
Step 6 Install the BBU power cables, as listed in the following table and shown in the
following figure.

CAUTION

NOTE

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-49 Connectors on BBU power cables

Base Station Cabinet Type Power Installation
Type Equipment Position

BTS3900A APM30H (Ver.E) EPU05A-06/08 "LOAD1",

"LOAD5", or
"LOAD6" port

EPU02D-02/ "LOAD0" or
EPU02B/EPU02S "LOAD1" port

DCDU16D "LOAD3" or
"LOAD4" port

TMC11H (Ver.E) DCDU-12C "LOAD4",

"LOAD5", or
"LOAD7" port

EPU02D-02/ "LOAD0" or
EPU02B/EPU02S "LOAD1" port

NOTE

If the LOAD8 and LOAD9 ports on the DCDU15D are occupied, install another DCDU to supply
power to the second BBU.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-196 Installing BBU power cables when the BBU is installed in the
transmission cabinet

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-197 Position for installing the power cables of the second power board in
an APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinet

Step 7 Attach labels to the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an
L-Shaped Label.
NOTE

● Attach an engineering label to the positive and negative cables on the power equipment
side. And attach the engineering labels with the same content to the corresponding cables
on the BBU side.
● It is recommended that a label on the BBU side be attached 70 mm to 100 mm (2.76 in. to
3.94 in.) away from the HDEPC connector.
● PWR0 and PWR1 in the following figure are for illustration only.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-198 Attaching labels

----End

1.12.15.3 Installing Boards in a BBU3910 and Surge Protection Boards

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing boards in a
BBU3910 and installing surge protection boards.

Context
● The boards in the BBU to be installed include main control boards (such as
the UMPT), baseband processing boards (such as the UBBP), universal
transmission processing boards (such as the UTRP), and power boards
(UPEU). The boards to be installed onsite depend on the configuration
requirements of a base station. The following part uses the procedure for
installing a UMPT and a UPEU as an example. The procedures for installing
other boards in the BBU are the same.
● The surge protection boards to be installed include the UELP and UFLP.

Operation Rules
● When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown by the
correct operation in the following figure.

Figure 1-199 Incorrect and correct operations when moving a board

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● When installing a board, hold the ejector lever side of the board with one
hand and hold another side of the board with the other hand to ensure that
the board is moving in the correct direction. Do not hold the board with only
one hand and never apply lateral forces to the board. The following figure
shows incorrect and correct operations of installing a board.

Figure 1-200 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (1)

● When installing a board, ensure that your hands are level so that the board
and the guide rails are on the same level. Do not apply lateral forces to the
board. Otherwise, the board will be distorted. The following figure shows
incorrect and correct operations of installing a board.

Figure 1-201 Incorrect and correct operations when installing a board (2)

CAUTION

● Handle the board with care and avoid collision. Do not pile or compress boards
after they are unpacked.
● When inserting a board into a subrack, prevent it from colliding with the
subrack and push it into the subrack until it snaps into place.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Put on a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE

When installing a board, wear ESD gloves to prevent contamination or

electrostatic damage to the board.

Step 2 Install a UMPT.

1. Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and slowly
remove the filler panel.
2. If there is an ejector lever on the board panel, pull out the ejector lever and
remove the board. If no ejector lever is available, remove the board directly.
3. Slowly insert the board into the slot until it snaps into place. Push the ejector
lever, if any.
4. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws on the board
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-202 Installing a UMPT

Step 3 Install a UPEU.

1. Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and slowly
remove the filler panel.
2. Slowly insert the board into the slot until it snaps into place.
3. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws on the board
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-203 Installing a UPEU

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 4 Optional: In an outdoor base station, you need to install a UELP or UFLP. The
following describes how to install a UELP in an SLPU as an example.
1. Loosen the screws on the filler panel in the slot to be used, and slowly
remove the filler panel.
2. Slowly insert the board into the slot until it snaps into place.
3. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws on the board
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-204 Installing a board in an SLPU

----End

1.12.16 Installing RFUs

If the RFUs initially configured for the base station do not reach the full
configuration, you can add RFUs based on the site requirements.

Context
● The RFU is installed in the vacant RFU slot in the cabinet, as shown in the
following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-205 Installation position of an RFU

● The colors and exteriors of the power cables in this document are for
reference only, which may differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with the countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers when the following issues occur:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer will be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● The following table lists specifications of RFU power cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-51 Specifications of RFU power cables

Base Station Power Connector at Connector at
Type Equipment One End the Other End

BTS3900AL DCDU-12C 3V3 connector EPC4 connector

(Ver.A)

● BTS3900 DCDU-01 3V3 connector Parallel terminal

(Ver.B)
● BTS3900A
(Ver.B)
● BTS3900L
(Ver.B)

● BTS3900 DCDU-11A 3V3 connector Female fast

(Ver.C) connector
● BTS3900A (pressfit type)
(Ver.C)
● BTS3900L
(Ver.C)

BTS3900 (Ver.D) DCDU-12A 3V3 connector EPC4 connector

● BTS3900A DCDU-12A 3V3 connector EPC4 connector

(Ver.D)
● BTS3900A
(Ver.E)
● BTS3900L
(Ver.D)

Table 1-52 Specifications of RFU power cables

Base Station Power Connector at Connector at
Type Equipment One End the Other End

BTS5900 (Ver.A) DCDU-12A 3V3 connector EPC4 connector

● BTS5900A DCDU-12A 3V3 connector EPC4 connector

● BTS5900L
(Ver.A)

NOTE

● In most regions, the RTN(+) cable is black and the NEG(-) cable is blue.
● In the UK, the RTN(+) cable is blue and the NEG(-) cable is gray.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE

Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or
ESD gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other
electronic components.

Step 2 Remove the 3V3 connector from the lower part of the filler panel in the slot
where the RFU is to be installed.

Step 3 Remove the filler panel.

● If a cabinet of Ver.D or Ver.E is used, turn the knob on the upper part of the
filler panel in the direction indicated by the mark on the filler panel, lift the
filler panel slightly, and pull out the filler panel, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 1-206 Removing the filler panel

● If a cabinet of Ver.B or Ver.C is used, loosen the four captive screws on the
filler panel and remove the filler panel.

Step 4 Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the guide rails until it snaps
into place.

Step 5 Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the four corners of the
RFU panel to secure the RFU to the subrack. The recommended torque is 0.6 N·m
(5.31 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Install the RFU power cables.

1. Optional: Remove the power connector for the newly installed RFU from the
DCDU-12A or DCDU-12C.
2. Connect the 3V3 connector on the RFU power cable to the RFU and use a
torque screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the connector to 0.6 N·m
(5.31 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the connector on the power cable for the newly installed RFU to the
DCDU. The following table lists the required types of connectors.

Table 1-53 Connectors for the RFU power cable

Base Station Type Power Equipment Connector for the RFU
Power Cable

BTS3900 (Ver.B), DCDU-01 Parallel terminal

BTS3900L (Ver.B), or
BTS3900A (Ver.B)

BTS3900 (Ver.C), DCDU-11A Female fast connector

BTS3900L (Ver.C), or (pressfit type)
BTS3900A (Ver.C)

BTS3900 (Ver.D), DCDU-12A EPC4 connector

BTS3900L (Ver.D),
BTS3900A (Ver.D), or
BTS3900A (Ver.E)

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) DCDU-12C EPC4 connector

Table 1-54 Connectors for the RFU power cable

Base Station Type Power Equipment Connector for the RFU
Power Cable

BTS5900 (Ver.A), DCDU-12A EPC4 connector

BTS5900L (Ver.A), or
BTS5900A

CAUTION

When installing an RFU power cable for a running base station, connect the
cable to the RFU before connecting it to the power equipment. The operations
in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal injury.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-207 Installing RFU power cables

Step 7 Install the RF jumpers, as described in the following table.

Table 1-55 Installing RF jumpers

Base Station Type Installation Method

BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), Installing RF Jumpers

BTS3900A (Ver.D), or BTS3900A (Ver.E)

BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), or Installing RF Jumpers

BTS3900 (Ver.D)

BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), or Installing RF Jumpers

BTS3900L (Ver.D)

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Installing RF Jumpers

Table 1-56 Installing RF jumpers

Base Station Type Installation Method

BTS5900A Installing RF Jumpers

BTS5900 (Ver.A) Installing RF Jumpers

BTS5900L (Ver.A) Installing RF Jumpers

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 8 Install the CPRI electrical cables, as described in the following table.

Table 1-57 Installing CPRI electrical cables

Base Station Type Installation Method

Step 9 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 10 Optional: In an outdoor base station, use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the
cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 11 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.12.17 Installing RRUs

If a site is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs and their cables must be
installed onsite. For detailed operations, see the related RRU installation guide.

1.12.18 Installing a PMU 15A in the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a PMU 15A and
related cables in the BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
NOTE

● In the stacked scenario, only one PMU 15A is installed in the basic lithium battery cabinet,
and the PMU 15A is not installed in the extension lithium battery cabinet.

The following figure shows the installation position of the PMU 15A in the
BBC5200D-L/BBC5200T-L.

Figure 1-208 Installation position of a PMU 15A in the BBC5200D-L

(1) PMU 15A

Figure 1-209 Installation position of a PMU 15A in the BBC5200T-L

(1) PMU 15A

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

The procedures and precautions for installing the PMU 15A and related cables in
the BBC5200D-L and BBC5200T-L cabinets are the same. The following uses the
BBC5200D-L as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the PMU 15A on the front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
two M4 nuts on the left mounting ear to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-210 Installing a PMU 15A

Step 2 Install a PGND cable for the PMU 15A, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminal (M4) at one end of the PGND cable for the PMU
15A to the ground point on the PMU 15A, and use a torque screwdriver to
tighten the terminal to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminal (M4) at the other end of the PGND cable for the
PMU 15A to the equipotential point on the cabinet door, and use a torque
screwdriver to tighten the terminal to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-211 Installing a PGND cable for the PMU 15A

Step 3 Install power cables for the PMU 15A, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the PMU 15A power cables to the
"PWR" port on the PMU 15A.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the PMU 15A power cables
to the "LOAD4" port on the EPU.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-212 Installing the PMU 15A power cables

Step 4 Install a monitoring signal cable for the PMU 15A, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the PMU 15A monitoring signal
cable to the "COM_IN" port on the PMU 15A.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the PMU 15A monitoring
signal cable to the "MON1-1/D_COM1-1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-213 Installing a PMU 15A monitoring signal cable

Step 5 Install a monitoring signal cable for the lithium battery, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the
lithium battery to the "CAN" port on the PMU 15A.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable
for the lithium battery to the "COM_IN" port on the lithium battery at the
bottom of the lithium battery cabinet.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-214 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the lithium battery

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.
----End

1.12.19 Installing the AC Heater

When a cabinet is in a low ambient temperature, an AC heater can be installed to
maintain a proper temperature in the cabinet. This section describes the procedure
for installing an AC heater in an APM30H or a TMC11H.

Context
The procedures for installing an AC heater are the same in an APM30H or a
TMC11H of Ver.D, Ver.B, Ver.C, and Ver.E. This section illustrates how to install an
AC heater in an APM30H (Ver.E) and a TMC11H (Ver.E).
If a service outlet unit (SOU) is not installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater in
the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-215. If an SOU
is installed in the cabinet, install the AC heater above the SOU, as shown in Figure
1-216.

Figure 1-215 Position of the AC heater (1)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-216 Position of the AC heater (2)

(1) AC heater (2) SOU

Procedure
Step 1 Slide the AC heater into the installation position, and tighten the four M6x12
screws on the panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-217 Installing the AC heater

Step 2 Install the AC heater power cable.

If... Then...

The AC heater is to be installed in an APM30H, Go to Step 2.1.

The AC heater is to be installed in a TMC11H, Go to Step 2.2.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Install the AC heater power cable in the APM30H.

a. Remove the cover plate of the AC junction box.
b. Connect the C13 connector at the other end of the AC heater power
cable to the power input port on the AC heater.
c. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and
yellow wires of the AC heater power cable to the L0, N0, and PE
terminals in the AC junction box, respectively.
d. Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and tighten the screws on
the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-218 Installing the AC heater power cable

2. Install the AC heater power cable in the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 1-219
and Figure 1-220.
a. Remove the cover plate of the AC junction box.
b. Connect the C13 connector at the other end of the AC heater power
cable to the power input port on the AC heater.
c. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and
yellow wires of the AC heater power cable to the L0, N0, and PE
terminals in the AC junction box, respectively.
d. Install the power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H as
follows: Route the cables into the cabinet from the left side of the
cabinet, and then connect the OT terminals at one end of the cables to
the L and N terminals in the AC junction box in the TMC11H and the
other end of the cables to the external power equipment.
e. Install the cover plate of the AC junction box and tighten the screws on
the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-219 Installing the heater power cable

Figure 1-220 Installing power cables for the AC junction box in the TMC11H

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1.12.20 Installing an HAU01A-01 in the IBBS300D

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an HAU01A-01
and its cables in the IBBS300D.

Context
The mounting ears and M4 countersunk screws of the heater are packed in an
accessory bag that is bound to the bottom of the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Use M4 recessed pan head screws to secure mounting ears onto the heater, and
use a screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 1-221 Installing the mounting ears for the heater

Step 2 Install the heater on the front door, and use a screwdriver to tighten the screws to
1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-222 Installing the heater

Step 3 Install the HAU01A-01 power cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plate of the
junction box. Then open the cover plate.
2. Connect the C13 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 power cable to the
"AC_IN" port on the heater.
3. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown, blue, and green and
yellow wires in the HAU01A-01 power cable to the "L0", "N0", and "PE"
terminals in the junction box and use a screwdriver to tighten the screws to
1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

4. Install the cover plate of the junction box and use a screwdriver to tighten the
screws on the cover plate to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-223 Installing an HAU01A-01 power cable

Step 4 Install the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal
cable to the "COM_IN" port on the HAU01A-01.
2. Connect the other end of the HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable to the
"D_COM0" port on the CCU01D-03.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-224 Installing an HAU01A-01 monitoring signal cable

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.12.21 Installing the eBat and WIUA

This section describes the procedure for installing an eBat and a WIUA in an
IBBS200D (Ver.E)/IBBS200T (Ver.E) or an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

Context
● The eBat and WIUA are supported by SRAN11.0 or a later version.
● An eBat is stuck to the front of a battery with the adhesive. The installation
method provided in this section is only a recommended method. However,
different batteries vary significantly. For any problem encountered during the
installation of an eBat, contact Huawei engineers.
● An eBat applies to a 12 V DC storage battery.
● You can stick the WIUA to the wall of the cabinet through the adhesive at the
rear of the WIUA or use a cable tie to bind the WIUA in the cabinet.

Procedure
● Install an eBat.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTICE

● Before installing an eBat, set the circuit breakers to OFF.

● Before installing an eBat, connect and secure the monitoring signal cable
of eBat to the battery terminals.
● After the eBat works properly, set the circuit breakers to ON.

a. Check that the input and output power switches on the storage batteries
have been turned off. If the switches are turned on, an excessively large
current may occur. The following figure shows the positions of button
powers switches/circuit breakers.

Figure 1-225 Power switches for storage batteries

b. Add an M6 OT terminal to one end of a monitoring signal cable, as

shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-226 Adding an OT terminal to a cable

c. Connect the two terminals at one end of the monitoring signal cable to
the positive and negative terminals on the storage battery, and the 4-pin
connector at the other end to the port on the eBat, as shown in Figure
1-227.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-227 Connecting the eBat to the storage battery

d. Optional: To install a Genesis battery, first remove each Genesis battery

and raise the rear handle, as shown in Figure 1-228. Then place the
Genesis battery into the cabinet and install the eBat. Connect a
monitoring signal cable for an eBat by referring to b and c. Before closing
the cover plate for a battery, route the monitoring signal cable along the
front, instead of one side, of the cover plate, as shown in Figure 1-229.

Figure 1-228 Position of the handle of a Genesis battery

(1) Rear handle (2) Front handle (3) Genesis battery

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-229 Connecting the eBat to the Genesis battery

e. Based on the cable length, determine the position for sticking the eBat
and clean the surface.
f. Remove the film from the bottom of the eBat, stick the eBat to the
surface of the storage battery, and press the eBat with a force of 20 N
(4.5 lbf) for 5s to 10s.
g. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling
Requirements.
h. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an
L-Shaped Label.
● Install a WIUA.
a. Clean the surface of the installation position and ensure that there is no
dust.
b. Remove the film from the bottom of the WIUA, stick the WIUA onto the
inner side of the battery cabinet's front door, and press the WIUA with a
force of 20 N (4.5 lbf) for 5s to 10s.
c. Connect one end of an RJ45 signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
WIUA, and the other end to the "D_COM1" port on the CMUH board in
the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or the "D_COM1" port on the CCU01D-03 board
in the IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
d. Figure 1-230 shows the installation position and cable connections.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-230 WIUA installation position and cable connections

e. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
f. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Cable-Tying Label.

----End

1.13 Installing Cables

Before cabinets used in the BTS3900A or the BTS5900A are delivered, the boards
and cables inside the cabinets have been installed. You only need to install the
external cables and cables for optional components onsite.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1.13.1 Cabling Requirements

Cables must be routed according to specified cabling requirements to prevent
signal interference.

NOTE

If a cable listed below is not required, skip the cabling requirements of the cable.

General Cabling Requirements

Bending radius requirements
● The bending radius of a 7/8'' feeder must be greater than 250 mm (9.84 in.),
and the bending radius of a 5/4'' feeder must be greater than 380 mm (14.96
in.).
● The bending radius of a 1/4'' jumper must be greater than 35 mm (1.38 in.).
The bending radius of a super-flexible 1/2'' jumper must be greater than 50
mm (1.97 in.), and the bending radius of an ordinary 1/2'' jumper must be
greater than 127 mm (5 in.).
● The bending radius of a power cable or PGND cable must be at least three
times the cable diameter.
● The bending radius of an optical fiber is at least 20 times its diameter, and the
bending radius of a breakout cable is at least 30 mm (1.18 in.).
● The bending radius of an E1/T1 cable must be at least three times its
diameter.
● The bending radius of a signal cable must be at least five times its diameter.
Cable binding requirements
● Cables must be bound before being routed out of the equipment.
● Cables of the same type must be bound together.
● Different types of cables must be separately routed and bound.
● The cables must be bound tightly and neatly. The sheaths of the cables must
not be damaged.
● The cable ties must face the same direction, and those at the same horizontal
line must be in a straight line.
● The excess of the indoor cable ties needs to be cut off. A 5 mm (0.20 in.)
excess needs to be reserved for each outdoor cable tie, without any sharp
edges.
● After cables are installed, labels or nameplates must be attached to the cables
at their ends, curves, and interconnection positions.
Security requirements
● When routing cables, avoid sharp objects or sharp edges on the wall. If
necessary, use tubes to protect the cables.
● When routing cables, keep the cables away from heat sources and use heat
insulation materials to insulate the cables from the heat sources.
● Reserve a proper distance (0.1 m or 0.33 ft is recommended) between
equipment and cables, especially at the cable curves to protect the cables and
equipment.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Indoor cabling requirements

● Cables are routed indoors through the feeder window.
● Reserve drip loops for all cables outside the feeder window before routing
them into the room. Ensure that the radiuses of the drip loops are greater
than or equal to the minimum bending radiuses of the cables.
● When routing a cable into the room, ensure that a person is assisting you in
the room.
● Apply waterproof treatment to the feeder window.

Outdoor Cabling Requirements

● After being connected to a ground clip on power cables, a ground cable must
be routed downwards to prevent water from entering the equipment to which
the power cables connect.
● Protect outdoor cables against potential damage. For example, put the cables
through tubes.
● The cables to be protected include AC power cables, transmission cables, and
cables routed underground.
● When routing cables through tubes on the ground below the cabinet, put a
30 mm to 50 mm (1.18 in. to 1.97 in.) length of the tubes into the base of the
cabinet but do not put the tubes into the cabinet. Use waterproof tape or
waterproof silicon gel to block both ends of the tubes and use sheet metal
tabs to secure the tubes to the cable holes in the base.
● When routing cables through tubes along a metal cable trough below the
cabinet, do not put the tubes into the base of the cabinet but cover the cable
trough and connect the tubes to the cable holes in the base.
● When routing RRU/AAU cables, ensure that the highest positions of the routes
of all cables (except RF cables and AISG cables) are lower than the bottom of
the module. This prevents water from entering the maintenance cavity of the
module along the cables.
● Use clips to secure cables outdoors. For the method of installing a clip, see the
installation guide delivered with the clip.
● Arrange cables neatly along the routing direction and use clips to secure the
cables.
● Determine the positions where the clips are installed according to the actual
situation. For example, 7/8" feeders are secured with clips at an interval of 1.5
m to 2 m (4.92 ft to 6.56 ft), CPRI/Ir optical fibers and power cables are
secured with clips at an interval of 1 m to 1.5 m (3.28 ft to 4.92 ft). Ensure
that the clips are evenly spaced and face the same direction.
● When fastening cables with a clip, ensure that the cables are aligned neatly
and are routed through the holes in the clip. Do not stretch the cables too
tightly.
● Cable ties are used to assist in binding cables. One cable tie can bind a
maximum of two cables.

There are two types of clips which are described as follows:

● A 3-hole clip is shown by illustration a in the following figure. It is often used
to fasten feeders.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● A 6-hole clip is shown by illustration b in the following figure. It is often used

to fasten power cables and CPRI/Ir optical fibers.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 12 AWG/4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)/10 AWG, or the power cable has
non-round core wires with the cross-sectional area of 12 AWG/4 mm2
(0.006 in.2)/10 AWG/6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG/7 AWG, the 6-hole clip
does not require the removal of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a
power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–8.3 mm2 (0.005–0.013 in.2)
RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG, or the power cable has non-round
core wires with the cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 (0.016 in.2), the 6-
hole clip requires the removal of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a
power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–8.3 mm2 (0.005–0.013 in.2)
RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 12 AWG/4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)/10 AWG, or the power cable has
non-round core wires with the cross-sectional area of 12 AWG/4 mm2
(0.006 in.2)/10 AWG/6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG/7 AWG/5 AWG, the 6-
hole clip does not require the removal of the rubber tube in the cable
hole for a power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–10 mm2 (0.005–0.016
in.2) RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)/8 AWG/10 mm2 (0.016 in.2), or the power
cable has non-round core wires with the cross-sectional area of 16 mm2
(0.025 in.2), the 6-hole clip requires the removal of the rubber tube in the
cable hole for a power cable. The 6-hole clip matches 3.3–10 mm2
(0.005–0.016 in.2) RRU/AAU power cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 6 AWG/16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), the 6-hole clip does not require the
removal of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a power cable. The 6-
hole clip matches 13.3–25 mm2 (0.021–0.039 in.2) RRU/AAU power
cables.
– If the RRU/AAU power cable has round core wires with the cross-sectional
area of 4 AWG/25 mm2 (0.039 in.2), the 6-hole clip requires the removal
of the rubber tube in the cable hole for a power cable. The 6-hole clip
matches 13.3–25 mm2 (0.021–0.039 in.2) RRU/AAU power cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-231 Exterior of the clips

(1) Cable hole for a (2) Cable hole for a (3) Cable hole for a (4) Rubber tube
feeder CPRI/Ir optical fiber power cable

The following figure shows the cables secured on a cable tray.

Figure 1-232 Cables secured on a cable tray

(a) 3-hole clip (b) 6-hole clip

The following figure shows the cables secured on a tower.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-233 Cables secured on a tower

(a) 3-hole clip (b) 6-hole clip

Special Cabling Requirements

Cabling of power cables
● Power cables must be installed in the position specified in engineering design
documents.
● If the length of a cable cannot meet the requirement, replace the cable rather
than adding connectors or soldering joints to lengthen the cables.
● Cables can only be routed under well-planned instructions. The cabling
activities are allowed only when qualified personnel and communication
facilities are available.
● Do not circle or twist cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● After routing a DC power cable onto the platform on a tower, route it along
the shortest path to the rails surrounding the platform, and route it along the
inside of the rails.
● After routing a DC power cable close to the equipment on a tower, use clips
to secure the power cable onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform.
Ensure the position where the power cable is secured is less than 1.5 m (4.92
ft) away from the equipment to which the power cable connects.
Cabling of PGND cables
● PGND cables for a base station must be connected to the same group of
ground bars.
● PGND cables cannot be routed overhead outdoors. All PGND cables must be
buried in the ground or laid out indoors.
● The external conductor of the coaxial wire and the shield layer of the shielded
cable must have proper electrical contact with the metal surface of the
equipment to which they are connected.
● PGND cables and signal cables must be installed with a certain distance
reserved between them to prevent interference from each other.
● Switches or fuses must not be installed on the PGND cables.
● Other devices must not be used for electrical connections of the PGND cables.
● All the metal parts in the housing of the equipment must be reliably
connected to the ground terminal.
Cabling of E1 cables
● E1 cables cannot be crossed with power cables, PGND cables, or RF cables
when being laid out. If transmission cables are routed with power cables,
PGND cables, or RF cables in parallel, the spacing between them must be
greater than 30 mm (1.18 in.).
● E1 cables are routed straightly and bound neatly with cable ties.
● Sufficient slack is provided in E1 cables at turns.
● E1 cables cannot be pressed by the cabinet door when routed through the
cabinet. The following figure shows both correct and incorrect ways of routing
the cables.

Figure 1-234 E1 cables routed in the cabinet

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabling of optical fibers

● At least three persons are required for routing optical fibers. The cabling
activities of optical fibers are allowed only when qualified personnel and
communication facilities are available.
● The operating temperature of optical fibers ranges from -40°C to +60°C (-40°F
to +140°F). If the actual temperature is beyond this range, take protective
measures or select another route.
● Do not circle or twist cables.
● Do not bind optical fibers at the position where they bend.
● Do not stretch, step on, or place heavy objects on optical fibers. Keep the
optical fibers away from sharp objects.
● When optical fibers are routed, the excess of the optical fibers must be coiled
around special equipment, such as a fiber coiler.
● An optical jumper must be bound using binding straps. If an optical fiber
needs to be secured in a cabinet or a piece of equipment, use binding straps
to bind it and then use cable ties to secure the binding straps to the cabinet
or equipment. Ensure that the optical fibers can flexibly move in the cable
ties. Right angle bending is not allowed. The following figure shows the
correct and incorrect manners of binding optical fibers.

Figure 1-235 Binding optical fibers

● When coiling optical fibers, apply even strength. Do not bend the optical
fibers with force.
● Unused optical connectors must be covered with dustproof caps.
● The optical fibers must not be pressed by the door of the cabinet when
routed, as shown in the following figures.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-236 CPRI/Ir optical fibers routed in the cabinet (1)

Figure 1-237 CPRI/Ir optical fibers routed in the cabinet (2)

Figure 1-238 FE/GE optical fibers routed in the cabinet

● After routing an optical fiber onto the platform on a tower, route it along the
shortest path to the rails surrounding the platform, and route it along the
inside of the rails.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● After routing an optical fiber near the equipment on a tower, use clips to
secure the optical fiber onto a pole or the rails surrounding the platform.
Ensure that the distance between the equipment and the position where the
optical fiber is secured is not too long.
● Coil the excess of the optical fibers near the equipment on the tower before
securing the cables onto the tower.

1.13.2 Cable Outlets

In the BTS3900A and BTS5900A, all cabinets are maintained from the front, and
all cables are routed into and out of the cabinets through the cable outlets at the
bottom. This section describes the cable outlets in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,
IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, BBC5200D-L, and BBC5300D-L.

APM30H/TMC11H
The following figure shows a top view of cable outlets at the bottom of an
APM30H/TMC11H.

Figure 1-239 Top view for the cable outlets in an APM30H or TMC11H

(1) Left cable outlet (2) Right cable outlet

IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L
The following figure shows a top view for cable outlets at the bottom of an
IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L.
There are two cable outlets on the right. Route cables preferentially through the
rear cable outlet (the one closer to the rear of the cabinet). If the space in the rear
cable outlet is insufficient, open the lid of the front cable outlet (the one closer to
the door) and route cables through the outlet.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-240 Top view for cable outlets in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L

(1) Left cable outlet (2) Right cable outlets

Cable bags are used in the cable outlets of the APM30H, TMC11H, and IBBS200D/
IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L. This facilitates the routing of all types of cables. The
following figure uses an APM30H as an example.

Figure 1-241 Cable bags in an APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200D/IBBS200T/

BBC5200D-L

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable outlets in an
APM30H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-59 Cable routing through the cable outlets in an APM30H

Ite Description
m

Left Cables routed through this cable outlet are as follows: APM30H input
cabl power cable, inter-cabinet equipotential cable, heating-film power cable
e in an IBBS200D, power cable for the junction box in the BBC5200D-L,
outl power cable for the junction box in a TMC11H, E1/T1 cable, CPRI
et electrical cable/optical fiber, GPS signal cable, GPS jumper, and
monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet.

Righ Cables routed through these cable outlets are as follows: RFC power
t cable, TMC11H input power cable, storage battery power cable, fan
cabl power cable in an IBBS200D, –48 V input power cable for the BBC5200D-
e L, TEC power cable in the IBBS200T, CPRI electrical cable, CPRI optical
outl fiber, FE/GE Ethernet cable, FE/GE optical fiber, RGPS signal cable, 1PPS
et +TOD signal cable, CMUH-BBU monitoring signal cable, power cable for
the junction box in an RFC, RRU power cable, and RRU optical fiber.

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable outlets in a
TMC11H.

Table 1-60 Cable routing through the cable outlets in a TMC11H

Ite Description
m

Left Cables routed through this cable outlet are as follows: AC input/output
cabl power cable, power cable for the junction box in a TMC11H, inter-cabinet
e equipotential cable, E1/T1 cable, CPRI electrical cable/optical fiber, GPS
outl signal cable, and GPS jumper.
et

Righ Cables routed through these cable outlets are as follows: TMC11H input
t power cable, monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUHs (in the
cabl RFC and TMC11H), FE cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, FE/GE optical fiber,
e RGPS signal cable, 1PPS+TOD signal cable, and CMUH-BBU monitoring
outl signal cable.
et

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable outlets in an
IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200D-L.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-61 Cable routing through the cable outlets in an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/

BBC5200D-L

Ite Description
m

Left Cables routed through this cable outlet are as follows: power cable for
cabl the junction box in a TMC11H, inter-cabinet equipotential cable, heating-
e film power cable in an IBBS200D, power cable for the junction box in the
outl BBC5200D-L, battery cabinet monitoring signal cable, and monitoring
et signal cable between cascaded CMUHs (in different battery cabinets).

Righ Cables routed through these cable outlets are as follows: TMC11H input
t power cable, storage battery power cable, storage battery cascading
cabl power cable, TEC power cable in an IBBS200T, fan power cable in an
e IBBS200D, and –48 V input power cable for the BBC5200D-L.
outl
et

Cable Outlets in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5300D-L

The following figure shows a top view for cable outlets at the bottom of an
IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5300D-L.

Figure 1-242 Top view for cable outlets in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5300D-L

(1) Left cable outlet (2) Right cable outlets

Cable bags are used in the cable outlets of an IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5300D-L.

This facilitates the routing of all types of cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-243 Cable bags in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T/BBC5300D-L

Table 1-62 Cable routing through the cable outlets in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T/

BBC5300D-L

Item Description

Left Cables routed through this cable outlet are as follows: power cable for
cabl the junction box in a TMC11H, inter-cabinet equipotential cable,
e heating-film power cable in an IBBS300D, power cable for the junction
outle box in the BBC5300D-L, monitoring signal cable in a battery cabinet,
t monitoring signal cable between cascaded CCU01D-03s (in different
battery cabinets), negative power cable for a storage battery, negative
power cable between cascaded storage batteries, negative TEC power
cable in an IBBS300T, and negative fan power cable in an IBBS300D.

Righ Cables routed through these cable outlets are as follows: TMC11H input
t power cable, positive power cable for a storage battery, positive power
cabl cable between cascaded storage batteries, positive power cable for the
e TEC in an IBBS300T, positive power cable for the fan in an IBBS300D, and
outle –48 V input power cable for the BBC5300D-L.
t

Cable Outlets in an RFC

The following figure shows the top view for the cable outlets in an RFC.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-244 Top view for the cable outlets in an RFC

(1) Left cable outlet (2) Right cable outlets (3) Cable outlets for RF cables
and CPRI electrical cables

NOTE

There are two cable outlets on the right. Route cables preferentially through the rear cable
outlet (the one closer to the rear of the cabinet). If the space in the rear cable outlet is
insufficient, open the lid of the front cable outlet (the one closer to the door) and route
cables through the outlet.

Cable bags are used in the cable outlets of an RFC on the left and right. The
exteriors of the cable bags in an RFC are the same as those in an APM30H. Cable
outlet modules are used in the cable outlets for RF cables and CPRI electrical
cables. The following figure shows the exteriors of the cable outlet modules.

Figure 1-245 Cable outlet modules in an RFC

(1) Cable outlets for CPRI electrical cables (2) Cable outlets for RF jumpers

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

The following table describes the cable routing through the cable outlets in an
RFC.

Table 1-63 Cable routing through the cable outlets in an RFC

Item Description

Left Cables routed through this cable outlet are as follows: APM30H
cable input power cable, PGND cable, inter-cabinet equipotential cable,
outlet heating-film power cable for an IBBS200D, power cable for the
junction box in the BBC5200D-L, power cable for the junction box in
a TMC11H, E1/T1 cable, CPRI optical fiber, GPS signal cable, GPS
jumper, monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet, and
monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUHs.

Right Cables routed through these cable outlets are as follows: TMC11H
cable input power cable, storage battery power cable, fan power cable in
outlet an IBBS200D, –48 V input power cable for the BBC5200D-L, TEC
power cable in an IBBS200T, RGPS signal cable, 1PPS+TOD signal
cable, FE cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, and FE/GE optical fiber.

Cable RF jumpers for RFUs and CPRI electrical cables are routed through
outlet these cable outlets.
for the
RF cable/
CPRI
electrical
cable

1.13.3 Installing Power Cables

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing external input
power cables and power cables for modules.

1.13.3.1 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing power cables
for various cabinets when AC power is supplied.

1.13.3.1.1 Installing Input Power Cables for an APM30H

Input power cables for an APM30H (Ver.E) in a BTS3900A or BTS5900A are the
EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 power cables. The cables are connected to the "AC
INPUT" terminals on the EPU and external power equipment, feeding external
power into the APM30H.

Prerequisites
● The PGND cable for a cabinet has been installed.
● The external power supply to the APM30H has been shut off.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
● If boards and modules are installed in a cabinet before delivery, power cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. External input power cables
must be installed onsite.
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
An APM30H (Ver.E) supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and
110 V dual-live-wire power supplies, which require different types of input power
cables for the APM30H, as listed in the following table.

Table 1-64 Specifications of the input power cables for the APM30H (Ver.E)
Cable One End The Other Color
End

EPU05A-06 L1 OT terminal Depending Brown

power cable in (M6, 6 mm2 or on the
a 220 V AC 0.009 in.2) external
three-phase equipment
scenario
L2 OT terminal Depending Black
(M6, 6 mm2 or on the
0.009 in.2) external
equipment

L3 OT terminal Depending Gray

(M6, 6 mm2 or on the
0.009 in.2) external
equipment

N OT terminal Depending Blue

(M6, 6 mm2 or on the
0.009 in.2) external
equipment

PE OT terminal Depending Green and yellow

(M6, 6 mm2 or on the
0.009 in.2) external
equipment

EPU05A-06 L OT terminal Depending Brown

power cable in (M6, 25 mm2 on the
a 220 V AC or 0.039 in.2) external
single-phase equipment
scenario

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other Color

End

N OT terminal Depending Blue

(M6, 25 mm2 on the
or 0.039 in.2) external
equipment

PE OT terminal Depending Green and yellow

(M6, 25 mm2 on the
or 0.039 in.2) external
equipment

EPU05A-08 L1 OT terminal Depending Black

power cable in (M6, 25 mm2 on the
a 110 V dual- or 0.039 in.2) external
live-wire equipment
scenario
L2 OT terminal Depending Red
(M6, 25 mm2 on the
or 0.039 in.2) external
equipment

N OT terminal Depending White

(M6, 25 mm2 on the
or 0.039 in.2) external
equipment

PE OT terminal Depending Green

(M6, 25 mm2 on the
or 0.039 in.2) external
equipment

NOTE

Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with the countries and regions.

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 power cables.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add OT terminals to the cables on the EPU side according to the instructions
in Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 power cables, as shown in Figure 1-246,
Figure 1-247, or Figure 1-248.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover
for the AC input terminals, and open the protective cover.
2. Optional: Remove the short-circuiting bar on the L1, L2, and L3 input
terminals. If 220 V single-phase or 110 V dual-live wire power is supplied, skip
this step.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Route the cable into the cabinet along the inner left side of the cabinet,
connect each wire of the cable to the corresponding terminal, and tighten the
screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover for the AC input terminals, and tighten the
screw to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-246 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side
(220 V AC three-phase)

(1) Short-circuiting bar

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-247 Installing the input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side
(220 V AC single-phase)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-248 Installing the input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side
(110 V AC dual-live-wire)

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.
----End

1.13.3.1.2 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to a TMC11H

Power cables from an APM30H to a TMC11H consist of the DCDU-12C power
cables and the power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables
feed power from the APM30H into the TMC11H. The power cables from the
APM30H to the TMC11H are required when a TMC11H is configured. They are
delivered with the TMC11H.

Prerequisites
● The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a
cable cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● The PGND cable for a cabinet has been installed.

The following table lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H
to the TMC11H.

Table 1-65 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H

Cable One End The Other End Color

Most UK
Regions

DCDU-1 RTN(+) EPC4 connector OT terminal Black Blue

2C (M6, 4 mm2 or
power 0.006 in.2)
cable
NEG(-) EPC4 connector OT terminal Blue Gray
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)

Power L OT terminal OT terminal Brown Brown

cable for (M4, 1.5 mm2 (M4, 1.5 mm2
a or 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)
junction
box N OT terminal OT terminal Blue Blue
(M4, 1.5 mm2 (M4, 1.5 mm2
or 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the DCDU-12C power cables and the power cable for the junction box in
the TMC11H.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to
the preceding table.
– For the power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H, see Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

– For the DCDU-12C power cables, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and
the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12C power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the "RTN(+)" and
"NEG(-)" terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws
on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD7" DC output port on the EPU in the APM30H.
4. Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

CAUTION

Ensure that the TMC11H power cable for a TMC11H added to a running base
station must be connected to the TMC11H first and then to the APM30H. The
operations in the reverse sequence may cause component damage or personal
injury.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-249 Installing DCDU-12C power cables

Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates of the
junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the "L3" and "N3"
terminals in the AC junction box in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on
the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the "L" and
"N" AC input terminals in the junction box in the TMC11H. Then tighten the
screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-250 Installing a power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.1.3 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to an RFC

Power cables from an APM30H to the extension RFC need to be installed when
two RFCs are configured.

Prerequisites
● The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a
cable cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
● The PGND cable for a cabinet has been installed.
● The "RFC1" circuit breaker on the EPU in an APM30H has been set to OFF.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
● If boards and modules are installed in a cabinet before delivery, power cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. External input power cables
must be installed onsite.
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the RFC.

Table 1-66 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the RFC
Cable One End The Other Color
End
Most UK
Regions

Power RTN(+ OT terminal OT terminal Black Blue

cables for ) (M6, 25 (M6, 25
the DC mm2 or mm2 or
junction 0.039 in.2) 0.039 in.2)
box
NEG(- OT terminal OT terminal Blue Gray
) (M6, 25 (M6, 25
mm2 or mm2 or
0.039 in.2) 0.039 in.2)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables for the DC junction box.
1. Cut the cable to suit the actual cable route.
2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the RFC power cables according to the
preceding table. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the DC junction box, as shown in the following figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
RFC. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the "RFC1"
terminals on the EPU in the APM30H. Then tighten the screws on the OT
terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-251 Installing power cables for the DC junction box

----End

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1.13.3.1.4 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L (APM:BBC
= 1:1)
This section describes the procedure for installing power cables from the APM30H
to the BBC5200D-L with the initial configuration of 1 BBC5200D-L.

Context
The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the BBC5200D-L.

Table 1-67 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L
Cable One End The Other End Color

Most UK
Regions

BBC5200D-L RTN(+ OT terminal OT terminal Red Blue

power cable ) (M8, 50 mm2 (M8, 50 mm2
or 0.078 in.2) or 0.078 in.2)

NEG(- OT terminal OT terminal Black Gray

) (M8, 50 mm2 (M8, 50 mm2
or 0.078 in.2) or 0.078 in.2)

-48 V input RTN(+ EPC4 SPC1 connector Black Blue

power cable ) connector
for the
BBC5200D-L NEG(- EPC4 SPC1 connector Blue Gray
) connector

Power cable L OT terminal OT terminal Brown Brown

for the (M4, 1.5 (M4, 1.5 mm2
junction box mm2 or or 0.0023 in.2)
in the 0.0023 in.2)
BBC5200D-L
N OT terminal OT terminal Blue Blue
(M4, 1.5 (M4, 1.5 mm2
mm2 or or 0.0023 in.2)
0.0023 in.2)

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Module or board configurations in APM30Hs vary depending on actual installation
scenarios.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare power cables.
1. Confirm the type of the lithium battery cabinet (BBC5200D-L) to be
configured and determine the cables to be prepared and installed according
to the preceding table.
2. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
3. Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to
the preceding table.
– -48V input power cable for the BBC5200D-L: See Assembling an SPC1
Connector and the Power Cable and Assembling an EPC4 Connector and
the Power Cable.
– Power cables for the BBC5200D-L and BBC5200D-L junction box: See
Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the BBC5200D-L, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the red and black power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the
right side of the EPU in the APM30H, respectively. Then, tighten the screws to
8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the red and black power cables
to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR" silkscreen on
the right side of the power distribution box in the BBC5200D-L, respectively.
Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-252 Installing power cables for a BBC5200D-L

Step 3 Install -48 V input power cables for the BBC5200D-L.

1. Connect the SPC1 connector at one end of the power cables to the "INPUT"
port on the power distribution box at the top of the BBC5200D-L.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the DC
output port ("LOAD8") on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-253 Installing -48 V input power cables for a BBC5200D-L

Step 4 Install a power cable for the junction box in the BBC5200D-L.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the M3 screw on the cover plate of the
junction box, and open the cover plate.
2. Connect one end of the power cable to the "L2" and "N2" terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H. Then tighten the screws to
1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the other end of the power cable to the "L" and "N" terminals in the
junction box on the left wall of the BBC5200D-L. Then tighten the screws to
1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Install the cover plate of the junction box and use a Phillips screwdriver to
tighten the M3 screws on the cover plate to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

CAUTION

When installing the power cable for the junction box in the BBC5200D-L, insulate
the wires of the cable and do not expose the wires outside the junction box, as
shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-254 Correct and incorrect methods of connecting the power cable for the
junction box in a BBC5200D-L

Figure 1-255 Install a power cable for the junction box in the BBC5200D-L.

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.1.5 Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L Cabinets
(APM:BBC = 1:2)
This section describes the procedure for installing power cables from the APM30H
to the BBC5200D-L cabinets with the initial configuration of 2 BBC5200D-L
cabinets.

Context
NOTE

When two BBC5200D-L cabinets are stacked, the cover on the right front cable outlet (close
to the door) in the upper cabinet must be opened and cables are routed through this cable
outlet.

The following table lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to
the BBC5200D-L cabinets.

Table 1-68 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the BBC5200D-L
cabinets
Cable One End The Other Color
End
Most UK
Regions

● BBC520 RTN(+ OT terminal OT terminal Red Blue

0D-L ) (M8, 50 mm2 (M8, 50 mm2 Black Gray
power NEG(- or 0.078 in.2) or 0.078 in.2)
cable )
● Power
cable
between
cascade
d
BBC520
0D-L
cabinets

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other Color

End
Most UK
Regions

-48 V input RTN(+ EPC4 SPC1 Black Blue

power ) connector connector Blue Gray
cable for NEG(-
the )
BBC5200D-
L

Power RTN(+ SPC1 SPC1 Black Blue

cable ) connector connector Blue Gray
between NEG(-
cascaded )
BBC5200D-
L fans

Power L OT terminal OT terminal Brown Brown

cable for N (M4, 1.5 mm2 (M4, 1.5 mm2 Blue Blue
the or 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)
junction
box in the
BBC5200D-
L

NOTE

● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Module or board configurations in APM30Hs vary depending on actual installation
scenarios.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the red and black power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the
right side of the EPU in the APM30H, respectively. Then, tighten the screws to
8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
NOTE

If battery cabinets and APM30Hs are in different versions (that is, a base station is
configured with Ver.D and Ver.E cabinets), remove the OT terminals from the "BAT"
terminals on the EPU before installing a cable.
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the red and black power cables
to the "RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR" silkscreen on
the right side of the power distribution box in the lower BBC5200D-L,
respectively. Then, tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
Step 3 Install the power cables between cascaded BBC5200D-L cabinets, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR" silkscreen on the left side of
the power distribution box in the lower BBC5200D-L. Then, tighten the screws
to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" wiring terminals near the "PWR" silkscreen on the
right side of the power distribution box in the upper BBC5200D-L. Then,
tighten the screws to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Install the cover plates of the junction boxes and use a Phillips screwdriver to
tighten the M3 screws on the cover plates to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-256 Installing the power cables for BBC5200D-L cabinets and the power
cables between cascaded BBC5200D-L cabinets

Step 4 Install the –48 V input power cables for BBC5200D-L cabinets and power cables
between cascaded fans.
1. Install the -48 V input power cables for the BBC5200D-L cabinets, as shown
by illustration "P1" in the following figure.
a. Connect the SPC1 connector at one end of the power cables to the
"INPUT" port on the power distribution box at the top of the lower
BBC5200D-L.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
DC output port ("LOAD8") on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Install the power cables between cascaded BBC5200D-L fans, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.
a. Connect the SPC1 connector at one end of the power cables to the
"OUTPUT" port on the power distribution box at the top of the lower
BBC5200D-L.
b. Connect the SPC1 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"INPUT" port on the power distribution box at the top of the upper
BBC5200D-L.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-257 Installing the –48 V input power cables for BBC5200D-L
cabinets and power cables between cascaded fans

Step 5 Install power cables for the junction boxes in BBC5200D-L cabinets.
1. Install the power cable for the junction box in the upper BBC5200D-L, as
shown by illustration "P1" in the following figure.
a. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the cover plate of
the junction box. Then open the cover plate.
b. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the "L1" and
"N1" terminals in the junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
c. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the "L"
and "N" terminals in the junction box on the left wall of the upper
BBC5200D-L. Then tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
d. Install the cover plate of the junction box and tighten the screw on it to
0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
2. Install the power cable for the junction box in the lower BBC5200D-L, as
shown by illustration "P2" in the following figure.
a. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw on the cover plate of
the junction box. Then open the cover plate.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

b. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the "L2" and
"N2" terminals in the junction box on the left inner wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
c. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the "L"
and "N" terminals in the junction box on the left wall of the lower
BBC5200D-L. Then tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
d. Install the cover plate of the junction box and tighten the screw on it to
0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

CAUTION

When installing the power cable for the junction box in the BBC5200D-L,
insulate the wires of the cable and do not expose the wires outside the
junction box, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-258 Correct and incorrect methods of connecting the power cable
for the junction box in a BBC5200D-L

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-259 Installing power cables for junction boxes in BBC5200D-L

cabinets

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 8 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.1.6 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

(APM:IBBS = 1:1)
This section describes the procedure for installing power cables from an APM30H
to an IBBS200D/IBBS200T at a site initially configured with only one IBBS200D/
IBBS200T.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
● If boards and modules are installed in a cabinet before delivery, power cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. External input power cables
must be installed onsite.
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● A site can be configured with either an IBBS200D or an IBBS200T.
The following table lists the power cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.D).

Table 1-69 Specifications of power cables from an APM30H to an IBBS200D/

IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Cable One End The Other End Color

Fan power RTN(+) EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Black

cable for the
IBBS200D NEG(-) EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Blue
TEC power
cable for the
IBBS200T

IBBS200D/ RTN(+) OT terminal (M8, 35 OT terminal (M8, Red

IBBS200T mm2 or 0.054 in.2) 35 mm2 or 0.054
power cable in.2)

NEG(-) OT terminal (M8, 35 OT terminal (M8, Black

mm2 or 0.054 in.2) 35 mm2 or 0.054
in.2)

Heating-film L OT terminal (M4, 1.5 OT terminal (M4, Brown

power cable mm2 or 0.0023 in.2) 1.5 mm2 or
for the 0.0023 in.2)
IBBS200D
N OT terminal (M4, 1.5 OT terminal (M4, Blue
mm2 or 0.0023 in.2) 1.5 mm2 or
0.0023 in.2)

The following table lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.E).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-70 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.E)

Cable One End The Other End Color

Most UK
Regions

Fan power RTN(+ EPC4 EPC4 Black Blue

cable for the ) connector connector
IBBS200D
NEG(- EPC4 EPC4 Blue Gray
TEC power ) connector connector
cable for the
IBBS200T

IBBS200D/ RTN(+ OT terminal OT terminal Red Blue

IBBS200T ) (M8, 50 mm2 (M8, 50 mm2
power cable or 0.078 in.2) or 0.078 in.2)

NEG(- OT terminal OT terminal Black Gray

) (M8, 50 mm2 (M8, 50 mm2
or 0.078 in.2) or 0.078 in.2)

Heating-film L OT terminal OT terminal Brown Brown

power cable (M4, 1.5 mm2 (M4, 1.5 mm2
for the or 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)
IBBS200D
N OT terminal OT terminal Blue Blue
(M4, 1.5 mm2 (M4, 1.5 mm2
or 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be
configured and determine the cables to be prepared and installed according
to the preceding table.
2. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
3. Add a connector or terminals to each end of the power cables according to
the preceding table.
– For the fan power cables for the IBBS200D and TEC power cables for the
IBBS200T, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
– For the IBBS200D/IBBS200T power cables and heating-film power cables
for the IBBS200D, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install IBBS200D/IBBS200T power cables, as shown in the following figure.

1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen in the lower part of the
power distribution box in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Then tighten the screws on
the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the battery
power port on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H and tighten the
screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
NOTE

Figure 1-260 Installing IBBS200D/IBBS200T power cables

Step 3 Optional: Install fan power cables for the IBBS200D. If no IBBS200D is configured,
skip this step.
1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the "INPUT"
port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution
box in the battery cabinet.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-261 Installing fan power cables for an IBBS200D

Step 4 Optional: Install the heating-film power cable for the IBBS200D. If no IBBS200D is
configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D, skip this step.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates of the
junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "L" and "N"
terminals in the heating-film junction box on the inner left wall in the
IBBS200D. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16
lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the "L2"
and "N2" terminals in the junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67 lbf·in.).

CAUTION

When installing the heating-film power cable for the junction box in the
IBBS200D, do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cable outside the
heating-film junction box, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-262 Correct and incorrect connections of the heating-film power cable
for the junction box in the IBBS200D

Figure 1-263 Installing the heating-film power cable for an IBBS200D

Step 5 Optional: Install TEC power cables for the IBBS200T. If no IBBS200T is configured,
skip this step.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the "INPUT"
port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution
box in the battery cabinet.
2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.

Figure 1-264 Installing TEC power cables for the IBBS200T

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 8 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.1.7 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

(APM:IBBS = 1:2)
This section describes the procedure for installing power cables from an APM30H
to IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts at a site initially configured with two IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
● If boards and modules are installed in a cabinet before delivery, power cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. External input power cables
must be installed onsite.
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● A site can be configured with either the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
NOTE

When two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are stacked, open the cover plate for the front cable outlet
on the right (close to the door) of the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and route cables through
this cable outlet.

The following table lists the power cables from an APM30H to IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).

Table 1-71 Specifications of power cables from an APM30H to IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)

Cable One End The Other End Color

Fan power RTN(+) EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Black

cable for the
IBBS200D NEG(-) EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Blue
Fan power
cable between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds
TEC power
cable for the
IBBS200T
TEC power
cable between
cascaded
IBBS200Ts

IBBS200D/ RTN(+) OT terminal (M8, 35 OT terminal (M8, Red

IBBS200T mm2 or 0.054 in.2) 35 mm2 or 0.054
power cable in.2)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other End Color

Power cable NEG(-) OT terminal (M8, 35 OT terminal (M8, Black
between mm2 or 0.054 in.2) 35 mm2 or 0.054
cascaded in.2)
IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts

Two heating- L OT terminal (M4, 1.5 OT terminal (M4, Brown

film power mm2 or 0.0023 in.2) 1.5 mm2 or
cables for 0.0023 in.2)
IBBS200Ds
N OT terminal (M4, 1.5 OT terminal (M4, Blue
mm2 or 0.0023 in.2) 1.5 mm2 or
0.0023 in.2)

The following table lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.E) cabinets.

Table 1-72 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T (Ver.E) cabinets

Cable One End The Other Color

End
Most UK
Regions

● Fan power RTN(+ EPC4 EPC4 Black Blue

cable for ) connector connector
the
IBBS200D NEG(-) EPC4 EPC4 Blue Gray
connector connector
● Fan power
cable
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ds
● TEC power
cable for
the
IBBS200T
● TEC power
cable
between
cascaded
IBBS200Ts

● IBBS200D/ RTN(+ OT terminal OT terminal Red Blue

IBBS200T ) (M8, 50 (M8, 50 mm2
power cable mm2 or or 0.078 in.2)
0.078 in.2)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other Color

End
Most UK
Regions
● Power cable NEG(-) OT terminal OT terminal Black Gray
between (M8, 50 (M8, 50 mm2
cascaded mm2 or or 0.078 in.2)
IBBS200Ds/ 0.078 in.2)
IBBS200Ts

Two heating- L OT terminal OT terminal Brown Brown

film power (M4, 1.5 (M4, 1.5 mm2
cables for mm2 or or 0.0023 in.
IBBS200Ds 0.0023 in.2) 2)

N OT terminal OT terminal Blue Blue

(M4, 1.5 (M4, 1.5 mm2
mm2 or or 0.0023 in.
0.0023 in.2) 2)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinets (IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts) to be
configured and determine the cables to be prepared and installed according
to the preceding table.
2. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
3. Add connectors or OT terminals to each end of the cables by performing the
following operations:
– For fan power cables for the IBBS200D, fan power cables between
cascaded IBBS200Ds, TEC power cables for the IBBS200T, and TEC power
cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector
and the Power Cable.
– For IBBS200D/IBBS200T power cables, power cables between cascaded
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, and heating-film power cables in the IBBS200Ds,
see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the IBBS200D/IBBS200T power cables, as shown by illustration "P1" in the
following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the DC output
terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
NOTE

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

of the power distribution box in the lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Then tighten

the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
Step 3 Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen in the upper part of the
power distribution box in the lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Then tighten the
screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen in the lower part
of the power distribution box in the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Then tighten
the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-265 Installing the IBBS200D/IBBS200T power cables and power cables
between cascaded IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Step 4 Optional: Install fan power cables for the IBBS200D and fan power cables
between cascaded IBBS200Ds. If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.
1. Install the fan power cables for the IBBS200D, as shown by illustration "P1" in
the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cables to the
"INPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power
distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Install the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.
a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cables to the
"OUTPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power
distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"INPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power
distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.

Figure 1-266 Installing fan power cables for the IBBS200D and fan power
cables between cascaded IBBS200Ds

Step 5 Optional: Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is

configured in the IBBS200D.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Install the heating-film power cable for the upper IBBS200D, as shown by
illustration "P1" in the following figure.
a. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates
of the junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
b. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the "L1" and
"N1" terminals in the junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
c. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the "L"
and "N" terminals in the heating-film junction box on the inner left wall
of the upper IBBS200D. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to
1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
d. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67
lbf·in.).
2. Install the heating-film power cable for the lower IBBS200D, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.
a. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates
of the junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
b. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the "L2" and
"N2" terminals in the junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
c. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the "L"
and "N" terminals in the heating-film junction box on the inner left wall
of the lower IBBS200D. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to
1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
d. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67
lbf·in.).

CAUTION

When installing the heating-film power cable for the junction box in the
IBBS200D, do not expose the wires of the heating-film power cable outside
the heating-film junction box, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-267 Correct and incorrect connections of the heating-film power

cable for the junction box in the IBBS200D

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-268 Installing the heating-film power cables for the IBBS200Ds

Step 6 Optional: Install TEC power cables for the IBBS200Ts and TEC power cables
between cascaded IBBS200Ts. If no IBBS200T is configured, skip this step.
1. Install the TEC power cables for the IBBS200T, as shown by illustration "P1" in
the following figure.
a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cables to the
"INPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power
distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Install the TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.
a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cables to the
"OUTPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power
distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"INPUT" port near the "FAN/TEC" silkscreen in the middle of the power
distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-269 Installing the TEC power cables for the IBBS200T and TEC power
cables between cascaded IBBS200Ts

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.1.8 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to an IBBS300D/IBBS300T

(APM:IBBS = 1:1)
This section describes the procedures for installing power cables from the APM30H
to the IBBS300D/IBBS300T, which include power cables for the IBBS300D, fan
power cables for the IBBS300D, power cables for the junction box, power cables
for the IBBS300T, and TEC power cables for the IBBS300T.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
● If boards and modules are installed in a cabinet before delivery, power cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. External input power cables
must be installed onsite.
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● A site can be configured with either an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

The following table lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T.

Table 1-73 Specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T

Cable One End The Other End Color

Fan power RTN(+) OT terminal (M4, EPC4 connector Black

cable for the 2.5 mm2 or
IBBS300D 0.0039 in.2)
TEC power
NEG(-) OT terminal (M4, EPC4 connector Blue
cable for the
IBBS300T 2.5 mm2 or
0.0039 in.2)

IBBS300D/ RTN(+) OT terminal (M8, OT terminal Red

IBBS300T 50 mm2 or 0.078 (M8, 50 mm2
power cable in.2) or 0.078 in.2)

NEG(-) OT terminal (M8, OT terminal Black

50 mm2 or 0.078 (M8, 50 mm2
in.2) or 0.078 in.2)

(Optional) L OT terminal (M4, OT terminal Brown

Power cable 1.5 mm2 or (M4, 1.5 mm2
for the 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)
junction box
N OT terminal (M4, OT terminal Blue
1.5 mm2 or (M4, 1.5 mm2
0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS300D or IBBS300T) to be
configured and determine the cables to be prepared and installed according
to the preceding table.
2. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
3. Add connectors or OT terminals to each end of the cables by performing the
following operations:
– For the fan power cables for the IBBS300D and TEC power cables for the
IBBS300T, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable and
Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable, respectively.
– For the IBBS300D/IBBS300T power cables and power cables for the
junction box in an IBBS300D/IBBS300T, see Assembling the OT Terminal
and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install IBBS300D/IBBS300T power cables, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the negative power cable (black) to
the "NEG(-)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of
the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the positive power cable (red) to the
"RTN(+)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of the
IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-270 Installing IBBS300D/IBBS300T power cables

Step 3 Optional: Install fan power cables for the IBBS300D. If no IBBS300D is configured,
skip this step.
1. Install the fan power cables for the IBBS300D, as shown in the following
figure.
a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the battery
cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner
right wall of the battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m
(14.16 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-271 Installing fan power cables for the IBBS300D

Step 4 Optional: Install TEC power cables for the IBBS300T. If no IBBS300T is configured,
skip this step.
1. Install the TEC power cables for the IBBS300T, as shown in the following
figure.
a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the battery
cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner
right wall of the battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m
(14.16 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-272 Installing TEC power cables for the IBBS300T

Step 5 Optional: Install the power cable for the junction box, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates of the
junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown and blue wires to the "L"
and "N" terminals in the junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to
tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the "L2"
and "N2" terminals in the junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-273 Installing the power cable for the junction box

Step 6 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 8 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.1.9 Installing Power Cables from an APM30H to IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

(APM:IBBS = 1:2)
This section describes the procedure for installing power cables from an APM30H
to IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts at a site initially configured with two IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts.

Prerequisites
● The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a
cable cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● The PGND cable for a cabinet has been installed.

Context
● If boards and modules are installed in a cabinet before delivery, power cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. External input power cables
must be installed onsite.
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● A site can be configured with either the IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts.

The following table lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts.

Table 1-74 Specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Cable One End The Other End Color

Fan power RTN(+) OT terminal (M4, EPC4 connector Black

cable for the 2.5 mm2 or
IBBS300D 0.0039 in.2)
TEC power
NEG(-) OT terminal (M4, EPC4 connector Blue
cable for the
IBBS300T 2.5 mm2 or
0.0039 in.2)

Fan power RTN(+) OT terminal (M4, OT terminal Black

cable 2.5 mm2 or (M4, 2.5 mm2
between 0.0039 in.2) or 0.0039 in.2)
cascaded
IBBS300Ds NEG(-) OT terminal (M4, OT terminal Blue
TEC power 2.5 mm2 or (M4, 2.5 mm2
cable 0.0039 in.2) or 0.0039 in.2)
between
cascaded
IBBS300Ts

IBBS300D/ RTN(+) OT terminal (M8, OT terminal Red

IBBS300T 50 mm2 or 0.078 (M8, 50 mm2
power cable in.2) or 0.078 in.2)
Power cable
NEG(-) OT terminal (M8, OT terminal Black
between
cascaded 50 mm2 or 0.078 (M8, 50 mm2
IBBS300Ds/ in.2) or 0.078 in.2)
IBBS300Ts

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other End Color

Power cable L OT terminal (M4, OT terminal Brown

for the 1.5 mm2 or (M4, 1.5 mm2
junction box 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)
(optional)
and power N OT terminal (M4, OT terminal Blue
cable for 1.5 mm2 or (M4, 1.5 mm2
cascaded 0.0023 in.2) or 0.0023 in.2)
junction
boxes
(optional)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the power cables.
1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinets (IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts) to be
configured and determine the cables to be prepared and installed according
to the preceding table.
2. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
3. Add connectors or OT terminals to each end of the cables by performing the
following operations:
– For fan power cables for the IBBS300D, fan power cables between
cascaded IBBS300Ds, TEC power cables for the IBBS300T, and TEC power
cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector
and the Power Cable and Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power
Cable.
– For IBBS300D/IBBS300T power cables, power cables between cascaded
IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, and power cables for junction boxes, see
Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts, as shown by

illustration "P2" in the following figure.
1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the negative cable (black) to the
"NEG(-)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
lower IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the negative cable (black) to the
"NEG(-)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
upper IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the positive cable (red) to the
"RTN(+)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of the
lower IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
4. Connect the OT terminal at the other end of the positive cable (red) to the
"RTN(+)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of the
upper IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Step 3 Install IBBS300D/IBBS300T power cables, as shown by illustration "P1" in the

following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the negative power cable (black) to
the "NEG(-)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of
the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
2. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the positive power cable (red) to the
"RTN(+)" wiring terminal in the DC junction box on the inner right wall of the
IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Then, tighten the screw to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
terminals near the "BAT" silkscreen on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 8 N·m (70.81 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-274 Installing the IBBS300D/IBBS300T power cables and power cables
between cascaded IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Step 4 Optional: Install fan power cables for the IBBS300D and fan power cables
between cascaded IBBS300Ds. If no IBBS300D is configured, skip this step.
1. Install the fan power cables for the IBBS300D, as shown by illustration "P1" in
the following figure.
a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the battery
cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner
right wall of the battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m
(14.16 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Install the fan power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the lower
battery cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on
the inner right wall of the lower battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws
to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
"NEG(-)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
upper battery cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction
box on the inner right wall of the upper battery cabinet. Then, tighten
the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-275 Installing the fan power cables for the IBBS300D and fan power
cables between cascaded IBBS300Ds

Step 5 Optional: Install TEC power cables for the IBBS300T and TEC power cables
between cascaded IBBS300Ts. If no IBBS300T is configured, skip this step.
1. Install the TEC power cables for the IBBS300T, as shown by illustration "P1" in
the following figure.
a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the battery

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner
right wall of the battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m
(14.16 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the
"LOAD8" DC output port on the right of the EPU in the APM30H.
2. Install the TEC power cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts, as shown by
illustration "P2" in the following figure.
a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "NEG(-)"
copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the lower
battery cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction box on
the inner right wall of the lower battery cabinet. Then, tighten the screws
to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
b. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
"NEG(-)" copper bar in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
upper battery cabinet and the "RTN(+)" copper bar in the DC junction
box on the inner right wall of the upper battery cabinet. Then, tighten
the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-276 Installing TEC power cables for the IBBS300T and TEC power
cables between cascaded IBBS300Ts

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Optional: Install the power cable for the junction box, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates of the
junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown and blue wires to the "L"
and "N" terminals in the junction box and use an M4 torque screwdriver to
tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the "L2"
and "N2" terminals in the junction box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.
Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-277 Installing the power cable for the junction box

Step 7 Optional: Install the power cable between cascaded junction boxes, as shown in
the following figure.
1. Use an M3 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cover plates of the
junction boxes. Then open the cover plates.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the brown and blue wires to the "L1"
and "N1" terminals in the junction box of the first IBBS300D and use an M4
torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the brown and blue wires to the
"L" and "N" terminals in the junction box of the extension IBBS300D and use
an M4 torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 1.6 N·m (14.16 lbf·in.).
4. Reinstall the cover plates and tighten screws on them to 0.3 N·m (2.67 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-278 Installing the power cable between cascaded junction boxes

Step 8 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.1.10 (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

?.1. Installing RRU Power Cables in a -48 V Scenario

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables.

Context
RRU power cables feed DC power into RRUs.

NOTE

Table 1-75 RRU configuration scenarios

Cabinet Maximum Power Supply Mode
Type Quantity
Configured
in a Single
Cabinet

APM30H 15 RRUs EPU05A+ODM06D:

(Ver.E) ● The first to ninth RRUs are powered by the
PDU03D in the EPU subrack.
● The tenth to fifteenth RRUs are powered by
the ODM06D, which obtains power from the
PDU01D in the EPU subrack.

APM30H 15 RRUs EPU05A+DCDU16D:

(Ver.E) ● The first to ninth RRUs are powered by the
PDU03D in the EPU subrack.
● For the tenth to fifteenth RRUs, three high-
power RRUs are powered by a DCDU16D
configured in the APM30H, and three low-
power RRUs are powered by an ODM06D,
which obtains power from the PDU01D
configured in the EPU subrack.

TMC11H 15 RRUs DCDU-12B:

(Ver.E) ● The first to sixth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the TMC11H.
● The seventh to fifteenth RRUs are powered by
the DCDU-12B in the RFC.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Maximum Power Supply Mode

Type Quantity
Configured
in a Single
Cabinet

TMC11H 15 RRUs DCDU-12B+DCDU16D:

(Ver.E) ● The first to sixth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the TMC11H.
● For the seventh to fifteenth RRUs, three high-
power RRUs are powered by a DCDU16D
configured in the TMC11H, and three low-
power RRUs are powered by a DCDU-12B in
the RFC.

APM30H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B:

(Ver.D) The first to ninth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

APM30H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B+DCDU16D:

(Ver.D) ● The first to sixth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.
● The seventh to ninth high-power RRUs are
powered by the DCDU16D configured in the
APM30H.

TMC11H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B:

(Ver.D) The first to ninth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

TMC11H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B+DCDU16D:

(Ver.D) ● The first to sixth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.
● The seventh to ninth high-power RRUs are
powered by the DCDU16D configured in the
TMC11H.

NOTE

● When the EPU05A or DCDU-12B supplies power to low-power RRUs, the maximum power
consumption of a low-power RRU is 800 W.
● When the DCDU16D supplies power to high-power RRUs, the maximum power consumption
of a high-power RRU is 1400 W.

Procedure
● Install RRU power cables on the DCDU-12B/EPU side.
a. Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

i. Route the RRU power cables into the cabinet through the right cable
bag. If there are two cable bags on the inner right side of the
cabinet, route the cables preferentially through the rear one.
ii. Strip a length of jacket off each RRU power cable at the position 300
mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in the cabinet to expose the
shield layer.
iii. Strip the shield layer while reserving a 70 mm (2.76 in.) length of it
and expose two core wires.
iv. Reserve the shield layer of 50 mm (1.97 in.) and wrap two layers of
insulation tape around the upper part of the shield layer to ensure
secure attachment of the shield layer.

NOTICE

The reserved shield layer must be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or longer.

Otherwise, the ground clip may not be tightened securely.

v. Route the RRU power cables through the ground clip and ensure that
the shield layers securely contact with the ground clip. Then tighten
the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
NOTE

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.

Figure 1-279 Installing the ground clip

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

When installing the ground clip for an RRU power cable, comply with the
following rules:
● When installing one to three RRU power cables, place all the power cables
at one side of the ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in the following
figure.
● When installing four or six RRU power cables, place the power cables
evenly on two sides of the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in the
following figure.
● When installing five RRU power cables, use two ground clips, with three or
four power cables in one ground clip and the remaining power cables in the
other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in the following figure.
● When installing seven, eight, nine, ten, or twelve RRU power cables, use
two ground clips and distribute the power cables by complying with the
preceding rules.
● When installing eleven RRU power cables, use two ground clips, with five
power cables in one ground clip and six power cables in the other ground
clip, as shown by illustration 4 in the following figure.
● When installing thirteen or more RRU power cables, use three ground clips
and distribute the power cables by complying with the preceding rules.

Figure 1-280 Installing ground clips (side view)

b. Connect one end of the RRU power cables to the RRUs. For the method
of adding connectors to the power cables on the RRU side, see the
corresponding RRU installation guide.

CAUTION

When installing an RRU power cable for a running base station, connect
the cable to the RRU before connecting it to the power system. An
incorrect sequence or reverse connection of the power cable will cause
damage to the RRU or injuries to the human body.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

c. Add EPC5/EPC11 connectors to the RRU power cables on the cabinet side
according to the instructions in Assembling an EPC5 Connector and the
Power Cable or Assembling an EPC11 Connector and the Power Cable.
d. Install RRU power cables in the cabinet, as shown in the following
figures.

Figure 1-281 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.E) (EPC5/

EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-282 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.D) (EPC5

connectors used on the cabinet side)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-283 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.D) (EPC11

connectors used on the cabinet side)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-284 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.E) (when

nine RRUs are configured and EPC5/EPC11 connectors are used on the
cabinet side)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-285 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.E) (when

fifteen RRUs are configured and EPC5/EPC11 connectors are used on the
cabinet side)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-286 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.D) (EPC5

connectors used on the cabinet side)

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-287 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.D) (EPC11

connectors used on the cabinet side)

e. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
f. Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and
tie the pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
g. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Sign Plate Label.
● Install RRU power cables on the DCDU16D side.
a. Before connecting cables, ensure that the circuit breaker is turned off.
When the circuit breaker is turned off, the handle is pulled out and the
indicator is green, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-288 Circuit breaker status before cable connection

b. Strip the sheaths off cables based on the cable stripping ruler for the
circuit breaker. Figure 1-289 shows the inapplicable cable specifications.
Figure 1-290 shows the cable stripping ruler.

Figure 1-289 Inapplicable cable specifications

Figure 1-290 Cable stripping ruler

c. Connect the connectors on the RRU power cables on the RRU side to the
power ports on the RRUs.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

CAUTION

● Only 6 mm2 to 16 mm2 (0.009 in.2 to 0.025 in.2) power cables can be
connected to the LOAD0 to LOAD2 circuit breakers. 12 AWG (3.3 mm2
or 0.005 in.2), 10 AWG (5.3 mm2 or 0.008 in.2), 4 mm2 (0.006 in.2), or
2.5 mm2 (0.0039 in.2) power cables cannot be connected to the
LOAD0 to LOAD2 circuit breakers. The length of the stripped sheath
must be between 17 mm (0.67 in.) and 19 mm (0.75 in.).
● When installing an RRU power cable in a base station that has been
deployed, first connect the connector on the RRU side, and then
connect the connector on the power equipment side. An incorrect
sequence or reverse connection of the power cable will cause damage
to the RRU or injuries to the human body.

d. Connect the RTN and NEG power cables to the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on
the DCDU16D.
i. Insert the Φ3 flat-head screwdriver into the "+" and "-" tool holes of
the circuit breaker obliquely in sequence, and insert the prepared
power cables into the "+" and "-" connection holes. Ensure that the
core wires contact the bottom of the connection hole and do not
split. The following figure shows the positions of the "+" and "-" tool
holes and connection holes.

Figure 1-291 Installing the RTN and NEG power cables

ii. Remove the flat-head screwdriver from the tool hole of the circuit
breaker.
iii. Pull each power cable slightly to check whether it is securely
connected. If the power cable is pulled out a bit or the wires are
exposed outside the hole, remove the power cable, cut the split
wires, and then strip the sheath and install the power cable again.
e. After the cable connection, route the power cables through the cable
claw and secure the cables, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-292 Securing power cables

f. Press the handle of the circuit breaker and turn on the circuit breaker to
supply power to loads. When the circuit breaker is turned on, the handle
is pressed and the indicator is red, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-293 Circuit breaker status after cable connection

g. Route the RRU power cables from the RRUs to the power equipment
through the feeder window. Install a ground clip near the feeder window
outside the equipment room, and connect the PGND cable on the ground
clip to the external ground bar. The installation procedure of ground clip
is as follows:
i. Use a wire stripper to strip 63 mm (2.48 in.) long jacket off the
power cable to expose the shield layer.

Figure 1-294 Stripping the jacket off the power cable

ii. Wrap the copper sheet of the ground clip around the shield layer of
the power cable, and use cable ties to bind them tightly. Then trim

Issue 14 (2020-01-20) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

off surplus part from the heads of the cable ties without leaving any
sharp edge.

Figure 1-295 Wrapping and binding the copper sheet of the ground
clip

(1) Hole for an RRU power cable tie (2) Hole for an RRU power cable tie (≥
(12 AWG/4 mm2 [0.006 in.2]) 6 mm2 [0.009 in.2])

iii. Wrap three layers of waterproof tape and three layers of insulation
tape around the ground clip.

Figure 1-296 Wrapping the waterproof tape and insulation tape

(1) Waterproof tape (2) Insulation tape (3) Cable tie

(4) Power cable (5) PGND cable -

NOTICE

Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm to 5 mm

(0.12 in. to 0.20 in.) away from the heads of the cable ties.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

h. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
i. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Sign Plate Label.
----End

?.2. Installing RRU Power Cables and ODM06D Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables.

Context
● An ODM06D provides power for the tenth to fifteenth RRUs. A PDU01D-01
must be installed in the APM30H to power the ODM06D.
● If boards and modules are installed in a cabinet before delivery, power cables
are also installed in the cabinet before delivery. External input power cables
must be installed onsite.
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● The type of the connector connecting to the power port on an RRU depends
on the type of the RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU
power cable, see the related RRU installation guide.
The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables.

Table 1-76 Specifications of RRU power cables

Cable Wire Color (North America/ One End The

Europe/UK/China) Other
End

ODM06 RTN(+) Brown/Brown/Blue/Red Cord end OT

D terminal terminal
power NEG(-) Blue/Blue/Gray/Blue (M6)
cable

RRU RTN(+) Black/Brown/Blue/Red EPC5/ Dependin

power EPC11 g on the
cable NEG(-) Blue/Blue/Gray/Blue connector port on
the RRU

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 For RRU power cables that are to be routed through the cable bag in the
APM30H, see Installing RRU Power Cables in a -48 V Scenario. This section only
describes the procedure for installing RRU power cables that are connected to the
ODM06D.

Step 2 Route the ODM06D power cables out of the cabinet from top down through the
cable bag on the inner left side of the cabinet.

NOTICE

● If 15 groups of RRU power cables have been installed, the ODM power cables
only can be routed from top to bottom. When the space in the cable bag is
insufficient, the bottom of the cable bag can be easily damaged if the ODM
power cables are routed from bottom to top.
● Before routing the ODM power cables from top down, bind all other cables so
that they are not affected by the ODM power cables.

Step 3 Add the cord end terminals to the ODM06D power cables on the ODM side
according to the instructions in Assembling a Cord End Terminal and the Power
Cable.

Step 4 Open the cover plate for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the cover plate for the
ODM06D, and then open the cover plate.
2. Use an M4 flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screw on the protective cover,
and then open the protective cover.

Figure 1-297 Opening the cover plate for the ODM06D

Step 5 Prepare the cables according to the cable diagram on the protective cover.

Step 6 Install the RRU power cables and ODM06D power cables, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cable clips.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

The screw on the cable clip can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-
sectional areas.
2. Partially loosen the PG connectors to route the cables through the PG
connectors.
3. Route the RRU power cables and ODM06D power cables through the PG
connectors.
4. Use an M4 Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminals onto the
terminal block. The recommended torque is 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).
5. Use the cable clips to secure the cables and tighten the M4 screws on the
cable clips to ensure that the cable clips closely contact with the shield layers
of the cables. The recommended torque is 1.4 N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).
6. Secure the PG connectors.

NOTICE

Tighten the PG connectors to protect the device from water damage.

Figure 1-298 Installing the RRU power cables and ODM06D power cables

(1) RRU power cables (2) ODM06D power cables

Step 7 Close the cover plate for the ODM06D, as shown in the following figure.
1. Close the protective cover and use an M4 flat-head screwdriver to secure the
screw on the protective cover.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

2. Close the cover plate and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws
on the cover plate.

Figure 1-299 Closing the cover plate for the ODM06D

Step 8 Connect the ODM06D power cables to the PDU01D in an APM30H.

1. Add the OT terminals to the ODM06D power cables on the cabinet side
according to the instructions in Figure 1-300.
2. Ensure that the circuit breakers on the RRUs connecting to the ODM06D are
turned off.
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
"RTN(+)" and "NEG(-)" terminals on the PDU01D in the APM30H. Then
tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-300 Installing the ODM06D power cables

Step 9 Connect the EPC5/EPC11 connectors on the power cables for the first to ninth
RRUs to the corresponding ports on the PDU03D-02 in the APM30H, as shown in
Figure 1-301.

CAUTION

When installing an RRU power cable for a running base station, connect the cable
to the RRU before connecting it to the power system. An incorrect sequence or
reverse connection of the power cable will cause damage to the RRU or injuries to
the human body.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-301 Installing power cables for 15 RRUs

Step 10 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 11 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 12 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

?.3. Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 V Scenario

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables in a -57 V scenario.

Context
When an RRU requires voltage boosting power distribution in a -57 V scenario, an
EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S/BDU70-03/SDU60-02/EPU02S-02 needs to
be configured. The following figures show installation positions.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

● The EPU02D/EPU02D-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/APM30H

(Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E) series cabinets.
● The EPU02B/EPU02S can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E)
series cabinets.
● The EPU02S-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E) series
cabinets.
● The BDU70-03/SDU60-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinets.
● The installation positions and installation methods of the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/
EPU02S/EPU02S-02 are the same. The installation positions and installation methods of the
BDU70-03/SDU60-02 are the same.

Figure 1-302 Installation positions

(1) Installation position of an EPU02D/ (2) Installation position of an EPU02D/

EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S/ EPU02D-02
EPU02S-02

Figure 1-303 Installation positions

(1) Installation position of an SDU60-02/BDU70-03

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-77 RRU power cables

Cable One End The Other End

Connecto Installation Connector Installation

r Position Position

RRU power EPC5/ ● LOAD0, Depending RRU

cable EPC11 LOAD1, or on the
connector LOAD2 port on port on
the BDU65-03 the RRU
in the EPU02D
● LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port on
the BDU65-03
in the
EPU02D-02

RRU power Bare wire ● LOAD0, Depending RRU

cable LOAD1, or on the
LOAD2 port on port on
the DCDU16D the RRU

RRU power EPC5/ LOAD0, LOAD1, Depending RRU

cable EPC11 or LOAD2 port on on the
connector the BDU70-03 in port on
the EPU02B the RRU

RRU power SPC1 LOAD0 or LOAD1 Depending RRU

cable connector port on the on the
SDU60-02 in the port on
EPU02S the RRU

RRU power SPC1 LOAD0 or LOAD1 Depending RRU

cable connector port on the on the
SDU60-02 in the port on
EPU02S-02 or the RRU
LOAD0 port on
the SDU30-01 in
the EPU02S-02

NOTE

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

1. Remove the three nuts that are used to secure the three ground clips onto the
three PGND cables from the inner right wall of the APM30H. Then remove
the three ground clips.
2. Secure the PGND cables with the ground clips to the two pivot screws on the
inner right wall of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L. Then tighten the
screws on the ground clips to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-304 Relocating the ground clips

Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.

1. Route the RRU power cables into the cabinet through the right cable bag. If
there are two cable bags on the inner right side of the cabinet, route the
cables preferentially through the rear one.
2. Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm
(11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in the cabinet to expose the shield layer.
3. Strip the shield layer while reserving a 70 mm (2.76 in.) length of it and
expose two core wires.
4. Reserve the shield layer of 50 mm (1.97 in.) and wrap two layers of insulation
tape around the upper part of the shield layer to ensure secure attachment of
the shield layer.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTICE

The reserved shield layer must be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or longer. If it is shorter

than 50 mm (1.97 in.), the ground clip may not be tightened securely.

5. Route the RRU power cables through the ground clip and ensure that the
shield layers securely contact the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on
the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
NOTE

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.

Figure 1-305 Installing the ground clip

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
● When installing one to three RRU power cables, place all the power cables at one side of
the ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in the following figure.
● When installing four or six RRU power cables, place the power cables evenly on two sides
of the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.
● When installing five RRU power cables, use two ground clips, with three or four power
cables in one ground clip and the remaining power cables in the other ground clip, as
shown by illustration 3 in the following figure.
● When installing seven/eight/nine/ten/twelve RRU power cables, use two ground clips and
distribute the power cables by complying with the preceding rules.
● When installing eleven RRU power cables, use two ground clips, with five power cables in
one ground clip and six power cables in the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 4 in
the following figure.
● When installing thirteen or more RRU power cables, use three ground clips and distribute
the power cables by complying with the preceding rules.

Figure 1-306 Installing ground clips (side view)

Step 3 Connect one end of the RRU power cables to the RRUs. For the method of adding
connectors to the power cables on the RRU side, see the corresponding RRU
installation guide.

CAUTION

When installing an RRU power cable for a running base station, connect the cable
to the RRU before connecting it to the power system. An incorrect sequence or
reverse connection of the power cable will cause damage to the RRU or injuries to
the human body.

Step 4 Add EPC5/EPC11 connectors to be inserted into the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B

onto the RRU power cables by following the instructions in Assembling an EPC5
Connector and the Power Cable and Assembling an EPC11 Connector and the
Power Cable. Add SPC1 connectors to be inserted into the EPU02S onto the RRU

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

power cables by following the instructions in Assembling an SPC1 Connector and

the Power Cable. Add SPC1 connectors to be inserted into the EPU02S-02 onto the
RRU power cables by following the instructions in Assembling an SPC1 Connector
and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Connect the RRU power cables to the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S/
EPU02S-02.
● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0", "LOAD1", and "LOAD2" ports on the EPU02D, as
shown in Figure 1-307 and Figure 1-308.
● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the EPU02D-02, as shown in
Figure 1-309 and Figure 1-310.
● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0", "LOAD1", and "LOAD2" ports on the EPU02B, as
shown in Figure 1-311 and Figure 1-312.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors at the other end of the RRU power cables to the
"LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the EPU02S, as shown in Figure 1-313.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors at the other end of the RRU power cables to the
"LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the first SDU (SDU60-02) and the "LOAD0"
port on the second SDU (SDU30-01) on the EPU02S-02, as shown in Figure
1-314.

Figure 1-307 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-308 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D for power supply and EPC11
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-309 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D-02 for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-310 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D-02 for power supply and
EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-311 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02B for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-312 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02B for power supply and EPC11
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-313 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02S for power supply and SPC1
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-314 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02S-02 for power supply and SPC1
connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Connect the RRU power cables to the BDU70-03/SDU60-02.

● Connect the EPC5 or EPC11 connectors on the power cables of the first to
third RRUs to LOAD0, LOAD1, and LOAD2 ports on the BDU70-03 in the
EPU05A, as shown in Figure 1-315 and Figure 1-316.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors on the power cables of the first and second
RRUs to LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports on the first SDU60-02 in the EPU05A, and
connect the SPC1 connector on the power cables of the third RRU to the
LOAD0 port on the second SDU60-02 in the EPU05A, as shown in Figure
1-317.

Figure 1-315 Installing RRU power cables (BDU70-03 for power supply and
EPC5 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-316 Installing RRU power cables (BDU70-03 for power supply and
EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-317 Installing RRU power cables (SDU60-02 for power supply and
SPC1 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

?.4. Installing Power Cables for High-Power RRUs (> 800 W)

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables
for high-power RRUs (> 800 W).

Context
To supply power for high-power RRUs (> 800 W), an ODM03D needs to be
configured.

Table 1-78 Configuration scenario

Cabinet Type Number of High-Power Power Supply Mode

RRUs

APM30H (Ver.E) 3 RRUs Two PDU03Ds in the EPU

subrack provide power
for RRUs.

TMC11H (Ver.E) 3 RRUs The DCDU-12B provides

power for RRUs.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Number of High-Power Power Supply Mode

RRUs

APM30H (Ver.D) 3 RRUs The DCDU-12B provides

power for RRUs.

input power connector DCDU-12B
cable

ODM03D- OT terminal ODM03D Depending on RRU

RRU power the port on
cable the RRU

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 Install ODM03D-RRU power cables according to the instructions in ODM03D User
Guide.

Step 2 Route the ODM03D input power cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Install the ground clip according to the sections "Installing RRU Power Cables."

Step 4 Connect the ODM03D input power cables to the ODM03D.

Step 5 Add an EPC5/EPC11 connector to the end of each power cable on the power
equipment side according to the instructions in Assembling an EPC5 Connector
and the Power Cable or Assembling an EPC11 Connector and the Power Cable.

Step 6 Connect the ODM03D input power cables to the power equipment according to
Table 1-80 and Figure 1-318.

Table 1-80 Cable connection positions

Power Equipment One End The Other End

PDU03D-02 LOAD0, LOAD1, or ODM03D

LOAD2 port

DCDU-12B Any of the LOAD0 to

LOAD5 ports

NOTE

Two adjacent power output ports on the power equipment are used to supply power for an
ODM03D.

Figure 1-318 Installing ODM03D input power cables

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.3.2 Installing Power Cables for DC Cabinets

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing power cables
for various cabinets and modules when –48 V DC power is supplied.

1.13.3.2.1 Installing Input Power Cables for an RFC

The input power cables for the RFC are the power cables for the DC junction box
in the RFC, and the cables feed –48 V DC power into the DC junction box in the
RFC.

Prerequisites
● The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a
cable cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
● The PGND cable for a cabinet has been installed.
● The external power supply to the RFC has been shut off.

Context
● The colors and exteriors of the power cables are for reference only, which may
differ from those of the cables onsite.
● Colors and exteriors of cables may vary with countries and regions.
● Contact Huawei engineers in the following situations:
– Cables and connectors are provided by customers.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

The input power cables for the RFC can be one group of 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) or
two groups of 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), as listed in the following table.

Cable One End The Other Color

End
Most UK
Regions

Power RTN(+) OT Depending Black Blue

cables for terminal on the
the DC (M6, 35 external
junction mm2 or equipment
box 0.054 in.2)
(35 mm2 or
0.054 in.2,
one group)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other Color

End
Most UK
Regions

NEG(-) OT Depending Blue Gray

terminal on the
(M6, 35 external
mm2 or equipment
0.054 in.2)

Power RTN(+) OT Depending Black Blue

cables for terminal on the
the DC (M6, 16 external
junction mm2 or equipment
box 0.025 in.2)
(16 mm2 or
NEG(-) OT Depending Blue Gray
0.025 in.2, terminal on the
two (M6, 16 external
groups) equipment
mm2 or
0.025 in.2)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare power cables for the DC junction box.
1. Cut the cables to suit the actual cable routes.
2. Add the corresponding connectors to the input power cables for the RFC
according to the preceding table. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal
and the Power Cable.
Step 2 Install the power cables for the DC junction box, as shown in the following figure.
1. Open the protective cover for the power input terminals.
2. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the "RTN(+)"
and "NEG(-)" terminals in the DC junction box on the inner left wall of the
RFC. Then tighten the screws on the OT terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).
3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the
external power equipment.
4. Reinstall the protective cover, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the protective cover to 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-319 Installing power cables for the DC junction box

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.3.2.2 (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables.

?.1. (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables in a -48 V Scenario

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
RRU power cables feed DC power into RRUs.

NOTE

Table 1-81 RRU configuration scenarios

Cabinet Maximum Power Supply Mode
Type Quantity
Configured
in a Single
Cabinet

APM30H 15 RRUs EPU05A+ODM06D:

(Ver.E) ● The first to ninth RRUs are powered by the
PDU03D in the EPU subrack.
● The tenth to fifteenth RRUs are powered by
the ODM06D, which obtains power from the
PDU01D in the EPU subrack.

APM30H 15 RRUs EPU05A+DCDU16D:

TMC11H 15 RRUs DCDU-12B:

(Ver.E) ● The first to sixth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the TMC11H.
● The seventh to fifteenth RRUs are powered by
the DCDU-12B in the RFC.

TMC11H 15 RRUs DCDU-12B+DCDU16D:

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Maximum Power Supply Mode

Type Quantity
Configured
in a Single
Cabinet

APM30H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B:

(Ver.D) The first to ninth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

APM30H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B+DCDU16D:

(Ver.D) ● The first to sixth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.
● The seventh to ninth high-power RRUs are
powered by the DCDU16D configured in the
APM30H.

TMC11H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B:

(Ver.D) The first to ninth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

TMC11H 9 RRUs DCDU-12B+DCDU16D:

(Ver.D) ● The first to sixth RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.
● The seventh to ninth high-power RRUs are
powered by the DCDU16D configured in the
TMC11H.

NOTE

● When the EPU05A or DCDU-12B supplies power to low-power RRUs, the maximum
power consumption of a low-power RRU is 800 W.
● When the DCDU16D supplies power to high-power RRUs, the maximum power
consumption of a high-power RRU is 1400 W.

Procedure
● Install RRU power cables on the DCDU-12B/EPU side.
a. Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.
i. Route the RRU power cables into the cabinet through the right cable
bag. If there are two cable bags on the inner right side of the
cabinet, route the cables preferentially through the rear one.
ii. Strip a length of jacket off each RRU power cable at the position 300
mm (11.81 in.) away from the cable bag in the cabinet to expose the
shield layer.
iii. Strip the shield layer while reserving a 70 mm (2.76 in.) length of it
and expose two core wires.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

iv. Reserve the shield layer of 50 mm (1.97 in.) and wrap two layers of
insulation tape around the upper part of the shield layer to ensure
secure attachment of the shield layer.

NOTICE

The reserved shield layer must be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or longer.

Otherwise, the ground clip may not be tightened securely.

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.

Figure 1-320 Installing the ground clip

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

Figure 1-321 Installing ground clips (side view)

b. Connect one end of the RRU power cables to the RRUs. For the method
of adding connectors to the power cables on the RRU side, see the
corresponding RRU installation guide.

CAUTION

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-322 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.E) (EPC5/

EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-323 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.D) (EPC5

connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-324 Installing RRU power cables in an APM30H (Ver.D) (EPC11

connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-325 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.E) (when

nine RRUs are configured and EPC5/EPC11 connectors are used on the
cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-326 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.E) (when

fifteen RRUs are configured and EPC5/EPC11 connectors are used on the
cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-327 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.D) (EPC5

connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-328 Installing RRU power cables in a TMC11H (Ver.D) (EPC11

connectors used on the cabinet side)

e. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-329 Circuit breaker status before cable connection

b. Strip the sheaths off cables based on the cable stripping ruler for the
circuit breaker. Figure 1-330 shows the inapplicable cable specifications.
Figure 1-331 shows the cable stripping ruler.

Figure 1-330 Inapplicable cable specifications

Figure 1-331 Cable stripping ruler

c. Connect the connectors on the RRU power cables on the RRU side to the
power ports on the RRUs.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

CAUTION

Figure 1-332 Installing the RTN and NEG power cables

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-333 Securing power cables

Figure 1-334 Circuit breaker status after cable connection

Figure 1-335 Stripping the jacket off the power cable

ii. Wrap the copper sheet of the ground clip around the shield layer of
the power cable, and use cable ties to bind them tightly. Then trim

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

off surplus part from the heads of the cable ties without leaving any
sharp edge.

Figure 1-336 Wrapping and binding the copper sheet of the ground
clip

(1) Hole for an RRU power cable tie (2) Hole for an RRU power cable tie (≥
(12 AWG/4 mm2 [0.006 in.2]) 6 mm2 [0.009 in.2])

iii. Wrap three layers of waterproof tape and three layers of insulation
tape around the ground clip.

Figure 1-337 Wrapping the waterproof tape and insulation tape

(1) Waterproof tape (2) Insulation tape (3) Cable tie

(4) Power cable (5) PGND cable -

NOTICE

Trim off surplus part of the cable ties at the position 3 mm to 5 mm

(0.12 in. to 0.20 in.) away from the heads of the cable ties.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

h. Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
i. Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a
Sign Plate Label.

----End

?.2. Installing RRU Power Cables in a -57 V Scenario

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing RRU power
cables in a -57 V scenario.

NOTE

● The EPU02D/EPU02D-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/APM30H

(Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E) series cabinets.
● The EPU02B/EPU02S can be used in the APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E)
series cabinets.
● The BDU70-03/SDU60-02 can be used in the APM30H (Ver.E) series cabinets.
● The installation positions and installation methods of the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/
EPU02S/EPU02S-02 are the same. The installation positions and installation methods of the
BDU70-03/SDU60-02 are the same.

Figure 1-338 Installation positions

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

(1) Installation position of an EPU02D/ (2) Installation position of an EPU02D/

EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S EPU02D-02

Figure 1-339 Installation positions

(1) Installation position of an SDU60-02/BDU70-03

Table 1-82 RRU power cables

Cable One End The Other End

Connecto Installation Connector Installation

r Position Position

RRU power EPC5/ ● LOAD0, Depending RRU

cable EPC11 LOAD1, or on the
connector LOAD2 port on port on
the BDU65-03 the RRU
in the EPU02D
● LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port on
the BDU65-03
in the
EPU02D-02

RRU power Bare wire ● LOAD0, Depending RRU

cable LOAD1, or on the
LOAD2 port on port on
the DCDU16D the RRU

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cable One End The Other End

Connecto Installation Connector Installation

r Position Position

RRU power EPC5/ LOAD0, LOAD1, Depending RRU

cable EPC11 or LOAD2 port on on the
connector the BDU70-03 in port on
the EPU02B the RRU

RRU power SPC1 LOAD0 or LOAD1 Depending RRU

cable connector port on the on the
SDU60-02 in the port on
EPU02S the RRU

RRU power SPC1 LOAD0 or LOAD1 Depending RRU

cable connector port on the on the
SDU60-02 in the port on
EPU02S-02 or the RRU
LOAD0 port on
the SDU30-01 in
the EPU02S-02

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: When the APM30H is stacked on an IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L,
relocate the ground clips in the APM30H to the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L,
as shown in the following figure.
1. Remove the three nuts that are used to secure the three ground clips onto the
three PGND cables from the inner right wall of the APM30H. Then remove
the three ground clips.
2. Secure the PGND cables with the ground clips to the two pivot screws on the
inner right wall of the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/BBC5200T-L. Then tighten the
screws on the ground clips to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-340 Relocating the ground clips

Step 2 Install the ground clip, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE

The reserved shield layer must be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or longer. If it is shorter

than 50 mm (1.97 in.), the ground clip may not be tightened securely.

5. Route the RRU power cables through the ground clip and ensure that the
shield layers securely contact the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on
the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

A ground clip can be used to secure a maximum of six RRU power cables.

Figure 1-341 Installing the ground clip

NOTE

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-342 Installing ground clips (side view)

Step 3 Connect one end of the RRU power cables to the RRUs. For the method of adding
connectors to the power cables on the RRU side, see the corresponding RRU
installation guide.

CAUTION

When installing an RRU power cable for a running base station, connect the cable
to the RRU before connecting it to the power system. An incorrect sequence or
reverse connection of the power cable will cause damage to the RRU or injuries to
the human body.

Step 4 Add an EPC5/EPC11 connector to the RRU power cables on the EPU02D/
EPU02D-02/EPU02B side. For detailed operations, see Assembling an EPC5
Connector and the Power Cable or Assembling an EPC11 Connector and the Power
Cable. Add an SPC1 connector to the RRU power cables on the EPU02S side. For
detailed operations, see Assembling an SPC1 Connector and the Power Cable.

Step 5 Connect the RRU power cables to the EPU02D/EPU02D-02/EPU02B/EPU02S.

● Connect the EPC5/EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0", "LOAD1", and "LOAD2" ports on the EPU02D, as
shown in Figure 1-343 or Figure 1-344.
● Connect the EPC5/EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the EPU02D-02, as shown in
Figure 1-345 or Figure 1-346.
● Connect the EPC5/EPC11 connectors at the other end of the RRU power
cables to the "LOAD0", "LOAD1", and "LOAD2" ports on the EPU02B, as
shown in Figure 1-347 or Figure 1-348.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors at the other end of the RRU power cables to the
"LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the EPU02S, as shown in Figure 1-349.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors at the other end of the RRU power cables to the
"LOAD0" and "LOAD1" ports on the first SDU (SDU60-02) and the "LOAD0"

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

port on the second SDU (SDU30-01) on the EPU02S-02, as shown in Figure

1-314.

Figure 1-343 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-344 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D for power supply and EPC11
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-345 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D-02 for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-346 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02D-02 for power supply and
EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-347 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02B for power supply and EPC5
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-348 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02B for power supply and EPC11
connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-349 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02S for power supply and SPC1
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-350 Installing RRU power cables (EPU02S-02 for power supply and SPC1
connectors used on the cabinet side)

Step 6 Connect the RRU power cables to the SDU60-02/BDU70-03.

● Connect the EPC5/EPC11 connectors on the power cables of the first to third
RRUs to LOAD0, LOAD1, and LOAD2 ports on the BDU70-03 in the EPU05A,
as shown in Figure 1-351 or Figure 1-352.
● Connect the SPC1 connectors on the power cables of the first and second
RRUs to LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports on the first SDU60-02 in the EPU05A, and
connect the SPC1 connector on the power cables of the third RRU to the
LOAD0 port on the second SDU60-02 in the EPU05A, as shown in Figure
1-353.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-351 Installing RRU power cables (BDU70-03 for power supply and
EPC5 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Figure 1-352 Installing RRU power cables (BDU70-03 for power supply and
EPC11 connectors used on the cabinet side)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-353 Installing RRU power cables (SDU60-02 for power supply and
SPC1 connectors used on the cabinet side)

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

?.3. Installing Power Cables for High-Power RRUs (> 800 W)

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables
for high-power RRUs (> 800 W).

Context
To supply power for high-power RRUs (> 800 W), an ODM03D needs to be
configured.

Table 1-83 Configuration scenario

Cabinet Type Number of High-Power Power Supply Mode

RRUs

APM30H (Ver.E) 3 RRUs Two PDU03Ds in the EPU

subrack provide power
for RRUs.

TMC11H (Ver.E) 3 RRUs The DCDU-12B provides

power for RRUs.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Type Number of High-Power Power Supply Mode

RRUs

APM30H (Ver.D) 3 RRUs The DCDU-12B provides

power for RRUs.

input power connector DCDU-12B
cable

ODM03D- OT terminal ODM03D Depending on RRU

RRU power the port on
cable the RRU

NOTE

Procedure
Step 1 Install ODM03D-RRU power cables according to the instructions in ODM03D User
Guide.

Step 2 Route the ODM03D input power cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 3 Install the ground clip according to the sections "Installing RRU Power Cables."

Step 4 Connect the ODM03D input power cables to the ODM03D.

Step 6 Connect the ODM03D input power cables to the power equipment according to
the following table.

Table 1-85 Cable connection positions

Power Equipment One End The Other End

PDU03D-02 LOAD0, LOAD1, or ODM03D

LOAD2 port

DCDU-12B Any of the LOAD0 to

LOAD5 ports

NOTE

Two adjacent power output ports on the power equipment are used to supply power for an
ODM03D.

Figure 1-354 Installing ODM03D input power cables

Step 7 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 8 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

Step 9 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Cable-Tying
Label.

----End

1.13.4 Installing Transmission Cables

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing transmission
cables between the cabinet and external transmission equipment.

1.13.4.1 Installing an E1/T1 Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an E1/T1 signal
cable.

Prerequisites

NOTICE

Ensure that connectors are added to both ends of an E1/T1 cable before cable
connections. Ensure that both ends of the E1/T1 cable are disconnected from any
equipment when the connectors are added.

Context
● Contact Huawei engineers when the following issues occur:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer will be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● The connection and routing of the E1/T1 cable in a -48 V DC TMC11H are the
same as those in a -48 V DC APM30H, as shown in Figure 1-355. This section
describes only the connection and routing in an APM30H.
● The following describes the connection and routing of the E1/T1 cable for a
BTS3900A (Ver.D). The connections and routing of E1/T1 cables for the
BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), and BTS3900A (Ver.E)
are the same.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the "OUTSIDE" port on the UELP, as shown
in the following figure.
NOTE

For the connection of the E1/T1 cable, see section "Transmission Cables" in .

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-355 Installing an E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet
on the left side of the cabinet bottom.
Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.4.2 Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet
cables.

Context
● Contact Huawei engineers when the following issues occur:
– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer will be used.
– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● An FE/GE Ethernet cable must be a shielded straight-through cable.
● The connections and routing of the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a -48 V DC
TMC11H are the same as those in a -48 V DC APM30H, as shown in Figure
1-357. This section describes only the connections and routing in an APM30H.
● The following describes the connections and routing of FE/GE Ethernet cables
for a BTS3900A (Ver.D). The connections and routing of FE/GE Ethernet cables

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

for the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), and BTS3900A
(Ver.E) are the same.

Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag or a cable outlet module
into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a proper position, as shown
in the following figure.
1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cables, and strip the
sheath off each cable for about 40 mm (1.58 in.) to expose the shield layer.
2. Loosen the screw on the ground clip and route each FE/GE Ethernet cable
through the ground clip.
3. Ensure that the shield layer is in good contact with the ground clip. Then,
tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 1-356 Installing the ground clip

Step 3 Install FE/GE Ethernet cables.

NOTE

For the connections of the FE/GE Ethernet cables in the corresponding base station, see section
"Transmission Cables" in .
● If a UMPTe/GTMUc is installed, connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable
to the "FE/GE0" or "FE/GE2" port on the UMPTe/GTMUc, as shown in the
following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-357 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables (UMPTe/GTMUc)

● If a transmission board other than UMPTe/GTMUc is installed, connect one

end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the "FE0" (or "FE/GE0") or "FE1" (or "FE/
GE1") port near the "OUTSIDE" silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in the
following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-358 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables (a transmission board other

than UMPTe/GTMUc)

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.4.3 Installing FE/GE Optical Fibers

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE optical
fibers.

Context
● Contact Huawei engineers when the following issues occur:

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer will be used.

– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
● Single-mode optical modules are labeled "SM" and multimode optical
modules are labeled "MM".
● The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a
multimode optical module is black or gray.
● An FE/GE optical fiber has an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC
connector at the other end.
● The "SFP0" and "FE/GE0" ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input.
Therefore, the two ports cannot be used simultaneously.
● The "SFP1" and "FE/GE1" ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input.
Therefore, the two ports cannot be used simultaneously.
● The following describes the connections and routing of FE/GE optical fibers in
an APM30H. The connections and routing of FE/GE optical fibers are the same
in a TMC11H and an APM30H.
● The following describes the connections and routing of FE/GE optical fibers
for a BTS3900A (Ver.D). The connections and routing of FE/GE optical fibers
for the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), and BTS3900A
(Ver.E) are the same.

NOTICE

● The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the

air for a long time. Therefore, keep the dustproof cap in the port of each
installed optical module plugged before you connect an optical fiber to the
optical module.
● CPRI optical fibers must be correctly connected in one time during the
installation. Otherwise, the RRU may malfunction, and cells may become
unusable.

NOTICE

Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.
For example, the FE1 port (optical transmission port) on a GTMU/GTMUb/GTMUc
supports only the 100 Mbit/s transmission rate and therefore can only use an
optical module that supports hundreds of megabits per second. In this scenario, an
optical module that supports thousands of megabits per second may cause the
transmission link to be disconnected.

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module into the FE/GE, FE, SFP, or XGE port on the main control
board or transmission board, as shown in Figure 1-359 and Figure 1-360.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding optical port on the
corresponding board in the BBU.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTICE

After removing dustproof caps from the optical module and optical fiber
connector, insert the optical fiber into the optical module immediately (within
one minute) to avoid pollution of the optical module or optical fiber
connector, which may cause an optical module alarm.

2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.

3. Lower the puller of the optical module.
4. Insert the optical module into the optical port.
5. Raise the puller of the optical module.

Figure 1-359 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

Figure 1-360 Installing an optical module

Step 2 Connect one end of the FE/GE optical fibers to the optical modules, as shown in
the following figure.
NOTE

For the connections of FE/GE optical fibers, see section "Transmission Cables" in .

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-361 Installing FE/GE optical fibers

Step 3 Route the other end of the FE/GE optical fibers out of the cabinet through the
cable outlet on the right side of the cabinet bottom.
Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.5 Installing Signal Cables

This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing signal cables.

1.13.5.1 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC

Scenarios
This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing monitoring
signal cables between cabinets in AC scenarios.

1.13.5.1.1 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H

This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H, its monitoring
signal cables have been installed before the delivery.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H, as shown in the
following figure, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be installed.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,

the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-362 1 RFC+1 APM30H expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the original
RFC and the added RFC), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in
the RFC.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-363 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H

Step 2 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 3 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.2 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L Expanded to 2 RFCs +1

APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2
BBC5200D-Ls.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L,
only one monitoring signal cable between the BBC5200D-L and the APM30H
needs to be installed onsite.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls, as

shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables need
to be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-364 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2

BBC5200D-Ls

Procedure
Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable for the lithium battery cabinet (between the
BBC5200D-L and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CMUH on the door of the BBC5200D-L.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_485" port
on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-365 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls,

two additional monitoring signal cables need to be installed.
1. Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUHs in two BBC5200D-
L cabinets. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the
CMUH on the door of the original BBC5200D-L, and the other end to the
"COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the door of the extension BBC5200D-L, as
shown by illustration "M1" in the following figure.
2. Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans in two RFC cabinets.
Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
original RFC, and the other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the
extension RFC, as shown by illustration "M2" in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-366 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.3 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2

RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1 TMC11H is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1
TMC11H, two monitoring signal cables need to be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1
TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal
cables need to be installed.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,

the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-367 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 RFCs+1

APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H

Procedure
Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable for the lithium battery cabinet (between the
BBC5200D-L and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CMUH on the door of the lower BBC5200D-L.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_485" port
on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-368 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1 TMC11H (1)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the RFC and the
TMC11H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN/U_COM0" port on the
FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-369 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 BBC5200D-L+1 TMC11H (2)

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1

TMC11H, two additional monitoring signal cables need to be installed.
1. Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded fan assemblies (between
the TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H, and the
other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as
shown by illustration "M1" in the following figure.
2. Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUHs in two BBC5200D-
L cabinets. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the
CMUH on the door of the original BBC5200D-L, and the other end to the
"COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the door of the added BBC5200D-L, as
shown by illustration "M2" in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-370 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.
Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.4 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls Expanded to 2 RFCs+1

APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H
+2 BBC5200D-Ls.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls,
two monitoring signal cables need to be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls, as
shown in the following figure, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to
be installed.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-371 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H

+2 BBC5200D-Ls

Procedure
Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUHs (between the upper
BBC5200D-L and lower BBC5200D-L), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the
door of the upper BBC5200D-L.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the CMUH on
the door of the lower BBC5200D-L.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-372 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls (1)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the lithium battery cabinet (between the
lower BBC5200D-L and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CMUH on the door of the lower BBC5200D-L.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_485" port
on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-373 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls (2)

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls,

one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be installed (between the original
RFC and the extension RFC).
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension
RFC, as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-374 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls

1.13.5.1.5 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2

RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs
+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1
TMC11H, three monitoring signal cables need to be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1
TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, one additional monitoring signal
cable needs to be installed onsite.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,

the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-375 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 RFCs

+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-376 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H (1)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-377 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H (2)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded fan assemblies (between the
TMC11H and the RFC), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN/U_COM0" port on the
FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-378 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H (3)

Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1

TMC11H, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be installed.
1. Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded fan assemblies (between
the TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.
2. Connect the other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension
RFC, as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-379 Installing a monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 BBC5200D-Ls+1 TMC11H

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.6 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Expanded to 2 RFCs

+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T, only one monitoring signal cable between the IBBS200D/IBBS200T
and the APM30H needs to be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts,
as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables
need to be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-380 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T expanded to 2 RFCs+1

APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_IN" port on the
CMUH on the door of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the "COM_485" port
on the FAN 02E in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-381 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts, two additional monitoring signal cables need to be installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUH modules
(between the original IBBS200D/IBBS200T and the added IBBS200D/
IBBS200T). Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the
CMUH on the door of the original IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and the other end to
the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the door of the added IBBS200D/
IBBS200T, as shown by illustration "M1" in the following figure.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
original RFC and the added RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the original RFC, and the other end to
the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the added RFC, as shown by
illustration "M2" in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-382 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.7 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T Expanded to 2 RFCs

+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/
IBBS300T, only one monitoring signal cable between the IBBS300D/IBBS300T
and the APM30H needs to be installed onsite.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts,

as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring signal cables
need to be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-383 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T expanded to 2 RFCs+1

APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CCU01D-03 on
the door of the IBBS300D/IBBS300T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the FAN 02E/
FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-384 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/

IBBS300Ts, two additional monitoring signal cables need to be installed.
1. Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CCU01D-03 modules
(between the original IBBS300D/IBBS300T and the extension IBBS300D/
IBBS300T). Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the
CCU01D-03 on the door of the original IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and the other
end to the "COM_IN" port on the CCU01D-03 on the door of the extension
IBBS300D/IBBS300T, as shown by illustration "M1" in the following figure.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
original RFC and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the original RFC, and the other end to
the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as shown by
illustration "M2" in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-385 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.8 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H

+1 TMC11H
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+1 TMC11H is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+1
TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, only
one monitoring signal cable between the TMC11H and the RFC needs to be
installed onsite.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, as shown in

the following figure, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be
installed.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-386 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+1

TMC11H

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the RFC and
the TMC11H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN/U_COM0" port on the
FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-387 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H, one
additional monitoring signal cable needs to be installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H, and the
other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as
shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-388 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.9 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H is expanded to one configured with 2
RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T+1 TMC11H, two monitoring signal cables need to be installed.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, two additional monitoring
signal cables need to be installed.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-389 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H expanded to 2

RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D/
IBBS200T and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the
door of the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the FAN 02E/
FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-390 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H (1)

Step 2 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the RFC and
the TMC11H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN/U_COM0" port on the
FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-391 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H (2)

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, two additional monitoring signal cables need to be
installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H, and the
other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as
shown by illustration "M1" in the following figure.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUH modules
(between the IBBS200D/IBBS200T and the extension IBBS200D/IBBS200T).
Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the CMUH on the
door of the original IBBS200D/IBBS200T, and the other end to the "COM_IN"

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

port on the CMUH on the door of the extension IBBS200D/IBBS200T, as

shown by illustration "M2" in the following figure.

Figure 1-392 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.10 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H

Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H is expanded to one configured with 2
RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/
IBBS300T+1 TMC11H, two monitoring signal cables need to be installed
onsite.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Figure 1-393 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H expanded to 2

RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS300D/
IBBS300T and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CCU01D-03 on
the door of the lower IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the FAN 02E/
FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-394 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H (1)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-395 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H (2)

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/

IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, two additional monitoring signal cables need to be
installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H, and the
other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as
shown by illustration "M1" in the following figure.
2. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUH modules
(between the IBBS300D or IBBS300T and the extension IBBS300D or
IBBS300T). Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the
CMUH on the door of the original IBBS300D/IBBS300T, and the other end to

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the door of the extension IBBS300D/
IBBS300T, as shown by illustration "M2" in the following figure.

Figure 1-396 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H

----End

1.13.5.1.11 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts Expanded to 2

RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts, two monitoring signal cables need to be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts,
as shown in the following figure, one additional monitoring signal cable
needs to be installed.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,

the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-397 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts expanded to 2 RFCs+1

APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUH modules (between
the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and the lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in
the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the
door of the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
2. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the CMUH on the
door of the lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-398 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (1)

Step 2 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the lower
IBBS200D/IBBS200T and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the
door of the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the FAN 02E/
FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-399 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts (2)

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be installed (between
the original RFC and the added RFC).
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
original RFC.
2. Connect the other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the added
RFC, as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-400 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Step 4 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 5 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 6 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.1.12 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts Expanded to 2

RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+1
APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts, two monitoring signal cables need be installed onsite.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts,

as shown in the following figure, one additional monitoring signal cable
needs to be installed.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-401 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts expanded to 2 RFCs+1

APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

Procedure
Step 1 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CCU01D-03 modules (between
the upper IBBS300D/IBBS300T and lower IBBS300D/IBBS300T), as shown in the
following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CCU01D-03 on
the door of the upper IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the
CCU01D-03 on the door of the lower IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-402 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts (1)

Step 2 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the lower
IBBS300D/IBBS300T and APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CCU01D-03 on
the door of the lower IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the FAN 02E/
FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-403 Installing monitoring signal cables in a base station configured with
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts (2)

Step 3 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/

IBBS300Ts, one additional monitoring signal cable must be installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
original RFC and the added RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the original RFC, and the other end to
the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the added RFC, as shown in the
following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-404 Installing monitoring signal cable in a base station configured with 2
RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

----End

1.13.5.1.13 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is expanded to one configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, three monitoring signal cables need to be installed
onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, one additional monitoring
signal cable needs to be installed.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

Figure 1-405 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to

2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUH modules (between
the upper battery cabinet and the lower battery cabinet), as shown in the
following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the
door of the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the CMUH on the
door of the lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-406 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H (1)

Step 2 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the lower
battery cabinet and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CMUH on the
door of the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the FAN 02E/
FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-407 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H (2)

Step 3 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the TMC11H
and the RFC), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN/U_COM0" port on the
FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-408 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H (3)

Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/

IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be
installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H, and the
other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as
shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-409 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.
Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.
----End

1.13.5.1.14 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H

Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+1
APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H is expanded to one configured with
2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/
IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, three monitoring signal cables need to be installed
onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts
+1 TMC11H, as shown in the following figure, one additional monitoring
signal cable needs to be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in an APM30H or TMC11H and does not monitor
other components.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-410 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to

2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-411 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H (1)

Step 2 Install the monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the lower
IBBS300D/IBBS300T and the APM30H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the CCU01D-03 on
the door of the lower IBBS300D or IBBS300T.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_485" port on the FAN 02E/
FAN02H in the APM30H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-412 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H (2)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-413 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H (3)

Step 4 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/

IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be
installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H, and the
other end to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as
shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-414 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+1 APM30H+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H

----End

1.13.5.2 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC

Scenarios
This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing monitoring
signal cables between cabinets in -48 V DC scenarios.

1.13.5.2.1 Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H Expanded to 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H

In this scenario, a base station configured with 1 RFC+1 TMC11H is expanded to
one configured with 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+1 TMC11H, its monitoring
signal cables have been installed before the delivery.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H, as shown in the

following figure, one additional monitoring signal cable needs to be installed
onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in a TMC11H and does not monitor other
components.

Figure 1-415 1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-416 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H

Step 2 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 3 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.2.2 Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs Expanded to 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs

This section describes the scenario where a base station configured with 1 RFC+2
TMC11Hs is expanded to one configured with 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs, one monitoring
signal cable needs to be installed onsite.
● If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs, as shown in the
following figure, one additional monitoring signal cable need to be installed.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,

the added BBU is installed in a TMC11H and does not monitor other
components.

Figure 1-417 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs expanded to 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the RFC and
the extension TMC11H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN/U_COM0" port on the
FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-418 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs

Step 2 Optional: If this base station is expanded to 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs, one additional
monitoring signal cable needs to be installed.
1. Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the
TMC11H and the extension RFC). Connect one end of the cable to the
"COM_OUT/U_COM1" port on the FAN 02E/FAN02H in the extension
TMC11H (without a BBU), and the other end to the "COM_IN" port on the
FAN 01D in the extension RFC, as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-419 Installing the monitoring signal cable in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.2.3 Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs

In this scenario, a base station is configured with 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.

Context
● When a base station is configured with 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs, two monitoring
signal cables need to be installed onsite.
● When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs,
the added BBU is installed in a TMC11H and does not monitor other
components.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the two
RFCs), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
left RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN" port on the FAN 01D in
the right RFC.

Figure 1-420 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs (1)

Step 2 Install the monitoring signal cable between cascaded fans (between the RFC and
the extension TMC11H), as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the "COM_OUT" port on the FAN 01D in the
right RFC.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the "COM_IN/U_COM0" port on the
FAN 02E/FAN02H in the TMC11H.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-421 Installing the monitoring signal cables in a base station configured
with 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs (2)

Step 3 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the
pipe to the cable outlet on the cabinet.

----End

1.13.5.3 (Optional) Installing BBU Interconnection Signal Cables

For base stations that support BBU interconnection, BBU interconnection signal
cables must be installed onsite.

Prerequisites
● The optical modules and optical fibers must be of the multimode type.
● Multimode optical modules on a UMPT or UCIU must meet the following
requirements:

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

– Supporting the rate of 4.9 Gbit/s in SRAN8.0 and earlier

– Supporting the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s in SRAN8.1 and later

Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules,
which can be distinguished as follows:
● The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a
multimode optical module is black or gray.
● The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode
optical module and "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.

There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the
rate, wavelength, and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-422 Label on an optical module (SFP)

(1) Rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode

Context
The following table lists scenarios supporting the BBU interconnection and the
positions to which BBU interconnection signal cables are connected. For details
about scenarios supporting the BBU interconnection, see BBU Interconnection
Signal Cable Connections.

Table 1-86 Positions to which BBU interconnection signal cables are connected

Interconnectio Installation Position

n Mode
BBU 0 BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT "M0" port on the UCIU "CI" port on the UMPT

UCIU+UMPT "M1" port on the UCIU "CI" port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT "CI" port on the UMPT "CI" port on the UMPT

NOTICE

The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air

for more than 20 minutes. Therefore, insert an optical fiber into an unpacked
optical module within 20 minutes.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

● BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

● BBU interconnection through UMPT+UMPT is not supported by SRAN8.0 and earlier
versions and supported by SRAN8.1 and later versions.

Procedure
● Install one or two BBU interconnection signal cables connecting the UCIU and
the UMPT.
a. Remove the dustproof caps from the corresponding ports on the BBUs
and install the optical modules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the
following figure.
i. Lower the puller of the optical module.
ii. Insert the optical module into the port.
iii. Raise the puller of the optical module.

Figure 1-423 Installing the optical module

b. Remove the dustproof caps from connectors on the optical fibers, as

shown in Figure 1-424.

Figure 1-424 Removing the dustproof caps from the optical fiber

c. Install one or two BBU interconnection signal cables connecting the UCIU
and the UMPT. The following figure shows the installation of two BBU
interconnection signal cables.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTE

● You need to install two BBU interconnection signal cables connecting the UCIU
and the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
● You need to install only one BBU interconnection signal cable connecting the UCIU
and the UMPT in GU+L or GL+U mode.

i. Connect one end of the cables to the "M0" and "M1" ports on the
UCIU in BBU 0.
ii. Connect the other end of the cables to the "CI" ports on the UMPT_U
and UMPT_L in BBU 1.
● Install the interconnection signal cables between the UMPTs in BBU 0 and the
UMPTs in BBU 1.
– (Optional) Install SFP+ cables.
i. Connect the end with the "Master" color-coding label of each cable
to the "CI" port on BBU 0 and connect the other end of each cable to
the "CI" port on BBU 1.
– (Optional) Install CPRI single-fiber bidirectional optical fibers.
i. Install optical modules, as shown in Figure 1-425 and Figure 1-426.
○ Remove the dustproof caps from the "CI" ports on the main
control boards in BBU 0. Lower the pullers of the optical
modules with the blue puller. Insert the optical modules into the
"CI" ports on the main control boards in BBU 0, and raise the
pullers of the optical modules.
○ Remove the dustproof caps from the "CI" ports on the main
control boards in BBU 1. Lower the pullers of the optical
modules with the purple puller. Insert the optical modules into
the ports on the main control boards in BBU 1, and raise the
pullers of the optical modules.

Figure 1-425 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-426 Installing an optical module

ii. Remove the dustproof cap from the LC connector labeled 2A.
iii. Separate the DLC connector into two LC connectors. Insert the LC
connector labeled 2A into the optical module on the UMPT board in
one BBU, as shown in the following figure. Insert the LC connector
labeled 1A into the optical module on the UMPT board in the other
BBU.

Figure 1-427 Installing a CPRI single-fiber bidirectional optical fiber

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-428 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT)

Figure 1-429 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS3900/BTS3900L

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-430 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS5900L/ILC29

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-431 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in a

BTS5900/APM30H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.E)/INS12

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-432 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (UMPT+UMPT) in

an APM5930

● Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling

Requirements.
● Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-
Shaped Label.
----End

1.13.5.4 Installing a BBU Alarm Cable

A BBU alarm cable transmits the alarm signals from the external alarm equipment
to the BBU.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the BBU alarm cable, as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the BBU alarm cable to the "EXT-
ALM0" or "EXT-ALM1" port on the UPEU in the BBU.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the BBU alarm cable to the
external alarm equipment.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-433 Installing a BBU alarm cable

Step 2 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

Step 3 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped
Label.

----End

1.13.6 Installing RF jumpers

An RF jumper connects an RFU and the antenna system for signal exchange
between the base station and the antenna system.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are ready: cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and
open-end wrench or torque wrench.

Context
The procedures for installing RF jumpers in the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A
(Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), and BTS3900A (Ver.E) are the same. This section
describes the procedure for installing RF jumpers in a BTS3900A (Ver.D).

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws from the cable outlets at the bottom of the cabinet and
remove the cable outlet modules.

Step 2 Route RF jumpers into the cabinet through the cable outlets in the cabinet
according to one of the manners shown in the following figure, and then lay out
the RF jumpers according to the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-434 Routes of RF jumpers

Step 3 Install RF jumpers, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE

Connect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.

Figure 1-435 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs

NOTE

RF signal cables between RFUs have been installed before delivery. Check whether the RF
signal cables between RFUs in the cabinet are securely connected onsite.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-436 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs

1. Connect the DIN connector on each jumper to the "ANT" port on an RFU.
2. Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) torque wrench to tighten the two DIN connectors
from bottom to top with a torque between 25 N·m (221.27 lbf·in.) and 35
N·m (309.78 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-437 Tightening DIN connectors

Step 4 Seal the cable outlets for RF jumpers, as shown in the following figure.
1. Route the RF jumpers through the corresponding cable outlets, and install the
cable outlet modules on the bottom of the cabinet.
2. Use rubber plugs to seal any unused cable outlets in the cable outlet
modules.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

3. Insert the metal plates and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to
1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).
NOTE

The procedure for sealing the cable outlets for RF jumpers in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) or
BTS3900A (Ver.E) cabinet is shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-438 Sealing the cable outlets for RF jumpers

(1) RF jumper (2) Cable outlet module (3) Metal plate

(4) Screw (5) Rubber plug -

NOTE

The procedure for sealing the cable outlets for RF jumpers in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) or
BTS3900A (Ver.C) is shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-439 Sealing the cable outlets for RF jumpers

(1) RF jumper (2) Cable outlet module (3) Metal plate

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

(4) Screw (5) Rubber plug -

Step 5 Attach color-coding labels to the RF jumpers. For details, see Attaching a Color-
coding Label.

Step 6 Connect the DIN straight male connectors at the other end of the RF jumpers to
the connectors of the jumpers connected to the feeders.

----End

1.13.7 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables

This section describes the procedure for installing CPRI electrical cables. A CPRI
electrical cable connects an RFU and a BBU and transmits CPRI signals between
them.

Context
● If boards have been installed in a base station before delivery, the CPRI
electrical cables are also installed in the APM30H/TMC11H and RFC before
delivery. If a second RFC (RFC 1) is required, you need to connect the CPRI
electrical cables for RFC 1.
● A 4 m (13.12 ft) CPRI electrical cable is recommended.
● The connections of CPRI electrical cables depend on the configurations of a
base station. For details, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" for the related
base station in 3900 & 5900 Series Base Station Cables. This section only
provides the routes of CPRI electrical cables.
● The connections and routes of CPRI electrical cables are the same in AC and
DC scenarios. This section describes the connections and routes of CPRI
electrical cables in an AC scenario.
● The connections and routes of CPRI electrical cables for the BTS3900A (Ver.B),
BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), and BTS3900A (Ver.E) are the same. This
section describes the connections and routes of CPRI electrical cables for a
BTS3900A (Ver.D).

Procedure
Step 1 Remove dustproof bags from the connectors at both ends of the CPRI electrical
cables.

Step 2 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the "CPRI"
ports on the corresponding boards.
NOTE

For details about how to insert and remove a CPRI electrical cable, see Inserting and Removing
CPRI Cables.

Step 3 Route the other end of CPRI electrical cables through the cable outlet on the inner
left side of the APM30H/TMC11H and the original RFC, into the extension RFC,
and finally to the corresponding RFUs, as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-440 Installing CPRI electrical cables

Step 4 Insert the SFP connectors at the other end of the CPRI electrical cables into the
"CPRI0" ports on the RFUs, as shown in Figure 1-440.
NOTE

● Wind and bind the redundant parts of CPRI electrical cables at the top of the DCDU-12A in
the RFC or in the base of the RFC.
● For a BTS3900A (Ver.E) or a BTS3900A (Ver.D), route cables according to Figure 1-440. For a
BTS3900A (Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C), CPRI electrical cables in RFC 1 must be routed to the
RFUs across the binding bracket above the RFUs.
● For a BTS3900A (Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C), bind the cables during the cable routing. Tie
the cables on the binding bracket by leading the cable ties through the cable to upper and
lower cabling teeth. Ensure that the heads of all the cable ties are outside the cabling teeth,
as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-441 Binding CPRI cables

(1) Cabling teeth (2) Binding bracket (3) Head of a cable tie

Step 5 Route the cables by following the instructions in 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 6 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.13.8 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables

A CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU and transmits CPRI signals
between them.

Context
● Single-mode optical modules are labeled "SM" and multimode optical
modules are labeled "MM".
● The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a
multimode optical module is black or gray.
● Optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding
ports.
● The connections of CPRI fiber optic cables depend on the configurations of a
base station. For details about the connections in the corresponding base
station, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the .
● The connections and routes of CPRI fiber optic cables for the BTS3900A
(Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), and BTS3900A (Ver.E) are the
same. This section describes the connections and routes of CPRI fiber optic
cables for a BTS3900A (Ver.D).
● A BTS3900A (Ver.B) supports a maximum of 6 RFUs and 6 RRUs. A BTS3900A
(Ver.C) supports a maximum of 6 RFUs and 6 RRUs. A BTS3900A (Ver.D)
supports a maximum of 6 RFUs and 9 RRUs. A BTS3900A (Ver.E) supports a
maximum of 6 RFUs and 15 RRUs or 12 RFUs and 9 RRUs.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTICE

● The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module on the BBU side, as shown in Figure 1-442 and Figure
1-443.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the "CPRI" port on the main control board
(for example, GTMU) or baseband processing unit (for example, WBBP) in the
BBU.
2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.
3. (Optional) For the optical module with a puller, lower the puller. For the
optical module with a handle, skip this step.
4. Insert the optical module into the "CPRI" port on the main control board (for
example, GTMU) or baseband processing unit (for example, WBBP).
5. (Optional) For the optical module with a puller, raise the puller. For the
optical module with a handle, skip this step.

Figure 1-442 Removing the dustproof cap from a port

Figure 1-443 Installing an optical module

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 2 Optional: Install a CPRI optical fiber for a two-fiber bidirectional optical module.

NOTICE

● When a CPRI optical fiber connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cables on
the BBU side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) long and the breakout cables on the RRU side
are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) long, respectively.
● If an LC-LC optical fiber is used, the "TX" port on the BBU must be connected to
the "RX" port on the RRU and the "RX" port on the BBU must be connected to
the "TX" port on the RRU.

1. Remove the dustproof caps from connectors on the optical fiber.

2. Insert the DLC connector labeled 2A and 2B of the CPRI optical fiber into the
optical module on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP/UBRI/UBBP board, as shown in the
following figure. Insert the DLC connector labeled 1A and 1B into the optical
module of the RRU.

Figure 1-444 Installing a CPRI optical fiber for a two-fiber bidirectional

optical module

Step 3 Optional: Install a CPRI optical fiber for a single-fiber bidirectional optical module.
1. Remove the dustproof cap from the LC connector labeled 2A.
2. Split the DLC connector into two LC connectors, as shown in the following
figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-445 Splitting a DLC connector into two LC connectors

3. Install the optical fiber.

Insert the LC connector labeled 2A into the single-fiber bidirectional optical
module on the LBBP/UBBP, as shown in the following figure. Insert the LC
connector labeled 1A into the optical module of the RRU.

Figure 1-446 Inserting an LC connector into a single-fiber bidirectional optical

module

Step 4 The following figure shows the connections of fiber optic cables.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-447 Fiber optic cables between the BBUs and RRUs

Step 5 Install the optical module on the RRU/AAU side.

● For a common optical module, install the optical module of the same type as
the BBU side on the RRU/AAU side and insert the end labeled "1A" and "1B"
of the fiber optic cable to the optical module on the RRU side. For details
about how to install optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the RRU
side, see the related RRU installation guide.

NOTICE

– Optical modules with the same label are of the same type.
– When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU/AAU, the
breakout cables on the BBU side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) long and the
breakout cables on the RRU/AAU side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) long,
respectively.
– If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the "TX" port on the BBU must be
connected to the "RX" port on the RF module and the "RX" port on the
BBU must be connected to the "TX" port on the RF module.

● For a 100 Gbit/s BIDI optical module, install the optical module with a dark
green handle on the AAU side, and connect the end labeled "1A" on the fiber
optic cable to the optical module on the AAU side. For details about how to
install optical modules and CPRI fiber optic cables on the AAU side, see the
related AAU installation guide.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Step 6 Route the CPRI fiber optic cables out of the cabinet from the cable outlets on the
left side of the cabinet bottom. For details, see 1.13.1 Cabling Requirements.
Step 7 Attach labels to the cables by following the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate
Label.

----End

1.14 Installation Checklist

This section describes how to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cables after the installation is complete.

Cabinet Installation Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the cabinet installation.

Table 1-87 Cabinet installation checklist

No. Item

1 The cabinet is located at the correct position according to the

engineering drawing.

2 The base is securely installed.

3 All the bolts, especially those for electrical connections, are tightened.
No flat washer or spring washer is missing, and flat washers and
spring washers are installed in the correct sequence.

4 The cabinet is clean, and dust and dirt are cleaned in a timely
manner.

5 The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired to

prevent corrosion.

6 Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.

7 Unused slots of the BBU are configured with filler panels.

NOTICE

Filler panels must be correctly installed in vacant BBU slots to ensure proper heat
dissipation. Otherwise, normal operation and service life of boards will be affected.

Installation Environment Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the installation environment.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-88 Installation environment checklist

No. Item

1 No excessive cable ties or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.

2 No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around
the cabinet.

3 Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.

Electrical Connection Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for electrical connections.

Table 1-89 Electrical connection checklist

No. Item

1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core

diameters. There should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding
system. No short circuit is allowed.

2 The ground cable is securely connected and the AC lead-in cable and
cables in the cabinet are correctly connected according to the
electrical design of the power system. The screws are tightened. The
input and output cables are not short-circuited.

3 The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off
instead of coiled up.

4 The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are
securely soldered or crimped.

5 The bare wires and the terminal handles of the wiring terminals are
coated with heat shrink tubings.

6 The flat washers and spring washers are well mounted on all OT
terminals. The contact surfaces on the OT terminals are not
deformed. The OT terminals are securely and properly connected.

7 The exterior of the lithium/storage battery is intact without any

scratch, dent, or crack.

8 The shell of the lithium/storage battery is clean without any leakage

trace.

9 The wiring terminal on the storage battery stands properly without

any damage, and the post is not covered with any acid substances.

10 The pressure relief valve of the battery is not transformed, and no

liquid leaks.

11 Power cables for lithium/storage batteries are connected to the

positive and negative electrodes correctly.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

No. Item

12 The voltage of the battery is normal.

● 2 V storage battery: 1.8 V to 2.35 V
● 12 V storage battery: 10.8 V to 14.1 V
● Overall voltage of the lithium/storage batteries: 43.2 V to 56.4 V

13 The circuit breakers of the lithium/storage batteries are turned off.

14 Before powering on the DCDU, ensure that the two sides of the
power cable for a load such as an RRU or a BBU are correctly
connected to the positive and negative terminals on the modules.
Reverse connections or short circuits may trigger the upper-level
protector for the DCDU after the DCDU is powered on.

Cable Installation Checklist

The following table lists the items to be checked for the cable installation.

Table 1-90 Cable installation checklist

No. Item

1 All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are

securely connected. All cable connectors, especially those at the
bottom of the cabinet, are securely installed.

2 All cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly
spaced and face the same direction.

3 Different types of cables, such as the power cables, PGND cables,

feeders, optical cables, E1/T1 signal cables, and FE/GE signal cables,
are separately bound.

4 The layout of all cables must facilitate the maintenance and capacity
expansion. For example, the local maintenance adapter must be
bound to a BBU cable claw and oriented outwards, as shown in the
following figure.

5 The labels at both ends of a cable are legible (labels are attached).

6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut
surfaces are smooth without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm
to 5 mm (0.11 in. to 0.19 in.) of the outdoor cable ties is reserved
when the cable ties are cut.

7 All vacant ports are properly protected. For example, unused CPRI
ports on BBU boards are protected using dust-proof caps.

8 The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid poor contact

that will cause an abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

NOTICE

Ensure that the PMID/PMIU is securely installed and the PMID-CCUC/PMIU-CCUB

monitoring signal cable is securely connected. Otherwise, the lithium/storage
batteries may be damaged during discharge.

Figure 1-448 Checking the local maintenance adapter

1.15 Powering On a Base Station

This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the
power supply to the components in a cabinet.

Prerequisites
● Input power cables for the BTS3900A or BTS5900A have been correctly
connected.
● The power supply to the BTS3900A or BTS5900A meets the requirements of
the power system.
● The external power supply to the BTS3900A or BTS5900A has been shut off.
● All circuit breakers or power switches in the APM30H have been turned off.
● All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been
turned off.
● All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D, IBBS200T,
or BBC5200T-L have been turned off.
● All circuit breakers in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T have been turned off.
● All switches on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T have
been turned off.
● The circuit breaker on the BBU has been turned off.
● Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Context
The following table lists circuit breakers used in a BTS3900A/BTS5900A.

Table 1-91 Circuit breakers in a BTS3900A/BTS5900A

Base Power Devicea Circuit Breaker

Station
Type

BTS3900 EPS 01A/EPS 01C, ● Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A/EPS 01C
A (Ver.B) DCDU-01, ● "BAT_SW0", "BAT_SW1", and "FAN/
DCDU-03B, TEC_SW2" circuit breakers on the power
DCDU-03C, and distribution box in the IBBS200D, IBBS200T,
power distribution or BBC5200T-L
box
● SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 to
RFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01
(These circuit breakers control power inputs
to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs,
respectively.)
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control
power inputs to RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan
assembly, and customer transmission
equipment.)
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control
power inputs to the BBU, fan assembly, and
customer transmission equipment.)

BTS3900 EPU03A-02/ ● Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02/

A (Ver.C) EPU03A-04, EPU03A-04
DCDU-11A, ● "BAT_SW0", "BAT_SW1", and "FAN/
DCDU-11B, TEC_SW2" circuit breakers on the power
DCDU-11C, and distribution box in the IBBS200D, IBBS200T,
power distribution or BBC5200T-L
box
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11A ("SW0" to "SW8" circuit breakers
control power inputs to RFU 0 to RFU 5, FAN
01B, BBU 0, and BBU 1. The "SW9" circuit
breaker is reserved.)
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11B (The circuit breakers control
power inputs to RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU 0,
BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B.)
● "SW0" to "SW9" circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11C ("SW0" to "SW5" circuit breakers
control power inputs to transmission
equipment. "SW6" to "SW9" circuit breakers
control power inputs to BBU 0, BBU 1,
EMUA, and FAN 02B.)

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Base Power Devicea Circuit Breaker

Station
Type

● BTS39 EPU05A-02/ ● Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02/

00A EPU05A-04, EPU05A-04
(Ver.D DCDU-12A, ● "BAT_SW0" and "BAT_SW1" circuit breakers
) DCDU-12B, on the power distribution box in the
● BTS39 DCDU-12C, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or BBC5200T-L
00A DCDU16D,
EPU02D, ● Circuit breaker on the inner right wall of the
(Ver.D IBBS300D or IBBS300T
_A2) EPU02D-02,
EPU02B, EPU02S, ● Switch on the power distribution box in the
● BTS39 EPU02S-02, and IBBS700D or IBBS700T
00A power distribution
(Ver.D box
_A1)

● BTS39 EPU05A-06/ ● Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-06/

00A EPU05A-08, EPU05A-08
(Ver.E) DCDU-12A, ● Circuit breaker on the PDU01D-01
● BTS39 DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, ● "BAT" circuit breaker on the power
00A distribution box in the top of the IBBS200D,
(Ver.E_ DCDU16D,
EPU02D, IBBS200T, or BBC5200T-L
A2)
EPU02D-02, ● Circuit breaker on the inner right wall of the
● BTS39 EPU02B, EPU02S, IBBS300D or IBBS300T
00A EPU02S-02, and
(Ver.E_ power distribution
A1) box
● BTS59
00A

a: In this document, EPU05A-06, EPU05A-08, EPU05A-02, EPU05A-04,

EPU03A-02, and EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU; EPS 01A and EPS 01C are
shortened to EPS; and DCDUs of all types are shortened to DCDU.

NOTE

The EPU02B, EPU02D, EPU02D-02, EPU02S-02, and EPU02S are used to provide voltage
boosting power distribution for high-power RRUs. The procedures for powering on a DCDU and
an EPU02B, EPU02D, EPU02D-02, EPU02S-02, and EPU02S are the same. This section describes
the procedure for powering on a DCDU as an example.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

DANGER

● Before the power-on operation, check that all power cables are correctly
connected. Any reverse power cable connection or short circuit of the positive
and negative poles may cause damage to equipment or unexpected injuries of
human body.
● Exercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves high
voltage operations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact
with the input voltage using a damp object may be fatal.

NOTICE

● Power on a cabinet or case-structured BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If

you power off a cabinet or BBU case for maintenance, restore power to the
cabinet or BBU case within 48 hours. Otherwise, device damage may occur.
● Power on a BBU3910A/BBU3910C/BBU5900A within 24 hours after unpacking
it. If you power it off for maintenance, restore power to it within 24 hours.
Otherwise, device damage may occur.
● After unpacking an RRU, you must power it on within 24 hours. If you power
off the RRU for maintenance, you must restore power to the RRU within 24
hours. Otherwise, device damage may occur.
● After unpacking an IBBS20D, you must power it on within 7 days. If you power
off the IBBS20D for maintenance, you must restore power to the IBBS20D
within 48 hours. Otherwise, device damage may occur.
● After unpacking an IBBS20L, you must power it on within 24 hours. If you
power off the IBBS20L for maintenance, you must restore power to the IBBS20L
within 24 hours. Otherwise, device damage may occur.

Process
Figure 1-449 and Figure 1-450 show the process for powering on a base station.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-449 Power-on process in an AC scenario

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-450 Power-on process in a DC scenario

Procedure
● Powering on an AC base station

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

a. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the input/output

terminal and the ground, and ensure that there is no short circuit.
b. Optional: If a site is configured with battery cabinets, turn on the "BAT"
circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS and circuit breakers or switches on the
power distribution box in the battery cabinets. Otherwise, skip this step.
c. Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H or
APM30 and battery cabinet.
d. Turn on the power circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS, and check the
power supply to components in the cabinet according to the following
table.

Table 1-92 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU/EPS

Cabinet Component Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H PMU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

PSU ● The power indicator is steady green.

● The fault indicator is steady off.

FAN ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

02A/FAN 0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
02B/FAN and off for 1s).
02D/FAN ● The ALM indicator is steady off.
02E/FAN02H

Fan in the The fan is working properly.

front door

PMIU The STATE indicator is steady green.

APM30 PMU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

PSU ● The power indicator is steady green.

● The fault indicator is steady off.

Fan The fan is working properly.

assembly

Fan in the The fan is working properly.

front door

IBBS200D Fan or TEC The fan or TEC is working properly, and the
or in the front RUN indicator on the CMUA, CMUE,
IBBS200T door CMUEA, or CMUH is blinking (on for 0.125s
and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s and off for
1s).

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Component Normal Power Supply Status

IBBS300D Fan or TEC The fan or TEC is working properly, and the
or in the front RUN indicator on the CCU01D-03 is
IBBS300T door blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s,
or on for 1s and off for 1s).

e. Optional: Turn on the power circuit breakers with loads on each DCDU in
the RFC, TMC11H, or TMC. If the DCDU does not provide any power
circuit breaker (for example, DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, or DCDU-12C), skip
this step.
f. Turn on the power switches on the UPEU in the BBU.
g. Check the power supply to each component according to the following
table.

Table 1-93 Normal status of components in the cabinet

Cabinet Component Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H/ BBU ● UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.

APM30 ● FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on
for 1s and off for 1s).
● Other boards: The RUN indicator is
blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s). The
CPRI indicator is not steady reda.

TMC11H FAN ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

02A/FAN 0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
02B/FAN and off for 1s).
02D/FAN ● The ALM indicator is steady off.
02E/FAN02H

Fan in the The fan is working properly.

front door

RFC RFU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

FAN ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

01A/FAN 0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
01B/FAN and off for 1s).
01C/FAN ● The ALM indicator is steady off.
01D

TMC Fan The fan is working properly.

assembly

Fan in the The fan is working properly.

front door

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Component Normal Power Supply Status

- RRU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

a: If the CPRI indicator is steady red, the optical module may be faulty
or the optical fiber may be broken. In this case, check the optical
module or optical fiber.

NOTE

The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other
indicators, see BBU Hardware Description.
h. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is
powered on, handle the fault according to the instructions in the
following table.

Table 1-94 Troubleshooting

Failure Type Handling Measure

Failure in the Check whether the power cables are connected

power supply to correctly:
all components in ● If the cables are incorrectly connected, turn off
the cabinet all circuit breakers, and then reconnect the
power cables.
● If the cables are connected correctly, replace
the power device.

Failure in the Perform the following operations:

power supply to a 1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin
board in the BBU of the slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or
missing. Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check
the status of indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove
the board, insert it into a vacant slot holding
the boards of the same type, and check the
status of the indicators.
● If the board works properly, the original slot
is faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
● If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In
this case, replace the board.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Failure Type Handling Measure

Failure in the Perform the following operations:

power supply to 1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse
other components terminal block that connects power supply to
in the cabinet the component is on. Skip this step and go to
step 2 if this component does not use any fuse
terminal block.
● If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is
on, the fuse is faulty. In this case, replace
the fuse according to the instructions in
Replacing a Fuse (EPU05A/DCDU) or
Replacing a Fuse (EPU03A/EPS).
● If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is
off, go to step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power
to the component.
● If the input power is normal, replace the
component.
● If the input power is abnormal, check
whether the power cable for the component
is securely connected. If the power cable is
not connected securely, turn off the circuit
breaker for the component (if there is no
circuit breaker for the component, remove
the connector on the power cable) and
reconnect the power cable. If the power
cable is connected securely, the circuit
breaker or fuse for the component may be
faulty. In this case, replace the circuit
breaker or fuse.

● Powering on a DC base station

a. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the input/output
terminal and the ground, and ensure that there is no short circuit.
b. Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC. If a TMC11H or
TMC is configured as the transmission cabinet, power on the TMC11H or
TMC.
c. Optional: Turn on the circuit breakers with loads on the DCDU in the
RFC. If the DCDU does not provide any circuit breaker (for example,
DCDU-12A or DCDU-12B), skip this step.
d. Optional: Turn on the circuit breakers with loads on the DCDU in the
TMC11H or TMC. If the DCDU does not provide any circuit breakers (for
example, DCDU-12C), skip this step.
e. Turn on the power switches on the UPEU in the BBU.
f. Check the power supply to each component according to the following
table.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Table 1-95 Normal status of components in the cabinet

Cabinet Componen Normal Power Supply Status
t

TMC11H BBU ● UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.

● FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on
for 1s and off for 1s).
● Other boards: The RUN indicator is
blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
or on for 1s and off for 1s). The CPRI
indicator is not steady reda.

FAN ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

02A/FAN 0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
02B/FAN and off for 1s).
02D/FAN ● The ALM indicator is steady off.
02E/
FAN02H

Fan in the The fan is working properly.

front door

RFC RFU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

FAN ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

01A/FAN 0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
01B/FAN and off for 1s).
01C/FAN ● The ALM indicator is steady off.
01D

TMC BBU ● UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.

● FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on
for 1s and off for 1s).
● Other boards: The RUN indicator is
blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
or on for 1s and off for 1s).

Fan The fan is working properly.

assembly

Fan in the The fan is working properly.

front door

- RRU ● The RUN indicator is blinking (on for

0.125s and off for 0.125s, or on for 1s
and off for 1s).
● The ALM indicator is steady off.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Cabinet Componen Normal Power Supply Status

a: If the CPRI indicator is steady red, the optical module may be faulty
or the optical fiber may be broken. In this case, check the optical
module or optical fiber.

g. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is

powered on, handle the fault according to the following table.

Table 1-96 Troubleshooting

Failure Type Handling Measure

Failure in the Check whether the power cables are connected

Failure in the Perform the following operations:

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Failure Type Handling Measure

Failure in the Perform the following operations:

----End

1.16 Follow-up Procedure

This section describes the operations that need to be performed after the
installation, which include sealing the cable outlets on the base of the cabinet and
repainting the cabinet.

1.16.1 Sealing Cable Outlets

After all installation procedures are complete, seal cable outlets of the cabinets
and bases.

Procedure
● Sealing cable outlets of a cabinet

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

a. Route cables through the cable bags and pull the drawstrings to fasten
the bags around the cables, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE

● All cables must be bound to the cable bridge on the corresponding side of a
cabinet.
● You can put your hands in the cable bag to route cables through the bag.
● The following figure describes the method of fastening cable bags in an RFC.
The same method is used for fastening the cable bags in other types of
cabinets.

Figure 1-451 Fastening the cable bags

● Sealing cable outlets on a base for an APM30H/TMC11H/IBBS200D/

IBBS200T/RFC
a. Use a baffle plate to block the redundant space in the cable outlet and
tighten the two screws and two butterfly nuts on each baffle plate to 1.2
N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-452 Sealing the cable outlets on the base with baffle plates

(1) Baffle plate on the right (2) Baffle plate at the rear (3) Baffle plate on the left

b. Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE

If the ambient temperature is low, use a heat gun to heat the fireproof mud for
convenient sealing.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-453 Using fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base

(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe

c. Tighten the three screws on the front cover plate of the base to 1.2 N·m
(10.62 lbf·in.) and close the front cover plate.
● Sealing cable outlets on a base for an IBBS300D/IBBS300T
a. Use a baffle plate to block the redundant space in the cable outlet and
tighten the two screws and two butterfly nuts on each baffle plate to 4.8
N·m (42.48 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-454 Sealing the cable outlets on the base with baffle plates

(1) Baffle plate on the left (2) Baffle plate at the rear (3) Baffle plate on the right

b. Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE

If the ambient temperature is low, use a heat gun to heat the fireproof mud for
convenient sealing.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-455 Using fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base

(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe

c. Tighten the three screws on the front cover plate of the base to 4.8 N·m
(42.48 lbf·in.) and close the front cover plate.
----End

1.16.2 Repainting
The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept intact. Any damaged paint
must be repaired to prevent corrosion.

Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to the
following table.

Table 1-97 Color codes

Intended Color Huawei Code International Code
Object

Cabinet RAL7035 YB026 RAL7035

Base 3010 light gray YB030 Pantone 422U

Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, slightly
rub the area with sandpaper to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in the following
figure.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-456 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper

Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or
dust from the rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with
another clean cloth, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 1-457 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol

Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the
paint. Then apply the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be
observed, as shown in the following figure.

NOTICE

Ensure that the paint coating is thin and even and paint drops are prohibited on
the coating to keep the surface smooth.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-458 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet

Step 5 Perform the subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating has been
exposed in the air for about 30 minutes.
NOTE

The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the
surrounding areas, without obvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no
longer be distinguishable. In addition, there should be no paint peeled off.

----End

1.16.3 (Optional) Pairing the eBat and WIUA

This section describes how to pair the eBat and WIUA for establishing a
monitoring link for the eBat.

Context
The WIUA and eBat are used together to monitor the operating status and alarms
of each battery.

Procedure
Step 1 Press the pairing button on the WIUA. The SETUP indicator on the WIUA blinks (1s
on and 1s off or 0.125s on and 0.125s off).
NOTE

● When the SETUP indicator is 1s on and 1s off, the pairing function of the WIUA has
been enabled.
● When the SETUP indicator is 0.125s on and 0.125s off, the WIUA is exchanging data
with a lower-level device wirelessly. The data exchange does not affect the pairing
process.
● After the SETUP indicator on the WIUA blinks for 10 minutes, the pairing function is
automatically disabled.

Step 2 Press and hold the pairing button on the eBat for 1s to 2s till the RUN/ALM
indicator starts blinking green (1s on and 1s off), indicating that the eBat has
been paired with the WIUA.
Figure 1-459 shows the positions of the pairing buttons and indicators on the
WIUA and eBat, respectively.

BTS3900A (Ver.E)
Installation Guide 1 BTS3900A (Ver.E) Installation Guide

Figure 1-459 Pairing buttons and indicators on the WIUA and eBat

(1) Pairing button (2) SETUP indicator (3) RUN/ALM indicator

Step 3 Optional: If the indicators do not blink normally after the pairing, replace the
eBat or WIUA with a new one. Repeat the pairing operations.

----End

APM5930 (DC) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
APM5930 (DC) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
303 pages
APM30H (Ver.C) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
APM30H (Ver.C) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
209 pages
1990 Volvo 740 Wiring Diagrams
80% (5)
1990 Volvo 740 Wiring Diagrams
14 pages
AutoCAD Electrical 2023 Black Book
From Everand
AutoCAD Electrical 2023 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
SolidWorks Electrical 2022 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Electrical 2022 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
AutoCAD Electrical 2021 Black Book
From Everand
AutoCAD Electrical 2021 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (2)
SolidWorks Electrical 2025 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Electrical 2025 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
AutoCAD Electrical 2024 Black Book
From Everand
AutoCAD Electrical 2024 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
AutoCAD Electrical 2020 Black Book
From Everand
AutoCAD Electrical 2020 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
4.5/5 (10)
Installation and Testing of Battery & Battery Charger
No ratings yet
Installation and Testing of Battery & Battery Charger
3 pages
Riscv Server Soc
No ratings yet
Riscv Server Soc
34 pages
AutoCAD Electrical 2025 Black Book
From Everand
AutoCAD Electrical 2025 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
670 Series 2.0 ANSI: DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual
No ratings yet
670 Series 2.0 ANSI: DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual
74 pages
SolidWorks Electrical 2024 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Electrical 2024 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
SolidWorks Electrical 2020 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Electrical 2020 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
5/5 (1)
Journeyman Electrician Exam Prep 2025-2026 Complete Study Guide with 400+ Practice Questions, Test-Taking Strategies, and Expert Insights to Help You Ace the Exam
From Everand
Journeyman Electrician Exam Prep 2025-2026 Complete Study Guide with 400+ Practice Questions, Test-Taking Strategies, and Expert Insights to Help You Ace the Exam
Mike L Porter
No ratings yet
Resume - Devendra Rathore - Digital Marketing Professional-Compressed
No ratings yet
Resume - Devendra Rathore - Digital Marketing Professional-Compressed
2 pages
Thurs 2-1-2025 (1-B) Practical Exam
No ratings yet
Thurs 2-1-2025 (1-B) Practical Exam
3 pages
SolidWorks Electrical 2023 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Electrical 2023 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
SolidWorks Electrical 2021 Black Book
From Everand
SolidWorks Electrical 2021 Black Book
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
AAU5636 (2300-2600 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5636 (2300-2600 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
79 pages
AAU5639 (2300 MHZ) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5639 (2300 MHZ) Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
81 pages
IBBS20L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IBBS20L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
11 pages
Ed TVN 041920
No ratings yet
Ed TVN 041920
88 pages
Autodesk Fusion 360 PCB Black Book (V 2.0.18719)
From Everand
Autodesk Fusion 360 PCB Black Book (V 2.0.18719)
Gaurav Verma
No ratings yet
Autodesk Fusion 360: A Tutorial Approach
From Everand
Autodesk Fusion 360: A Tutorial Approach
Prof. Sham Tickoo
No ratings yet
IBBS Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (02) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IBBS Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (02) (PDF) - EN
209 pages
IBBS&BBC Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IBBS&BBC Installation Guide For Reconstructing Existing Cabinets To Use Lithium Batteries (03) (PDF) - EN
334 pages
ALL Boolean Algebra
No ratings yet
ALL Boolean Algebra
25 pages
HAAU5323 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
HAAU5323 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
67 pages
AAU5310 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5310 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
20 pages
AAU5271 Hardware Description (10) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5271 Hardware Description (10) (PDF) - EN
22 pages
HAAU5213 Hardware Description (Draft C) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
HAAU5213 Hardware Description (Draft C) (PDF) - EN
17 pages
HAAU5222 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
HAAU5222 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
74 pages
AAU5636w (3500-3700 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5636w (3500-3700 MHZ) Installation Guide (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
82 pages
AAU5613 Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5613 Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
68 pages
BBC5200D-L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BBC5200D-L Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
11 pages
IMS5906 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IMS5906 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
10 pages
IMB05 Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IMB05 Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
148 pages
AAU5636 Hardware Description (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5636 Hardware Description (Draft A) (PDF) - EN
18 pages
IFS5906 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
IFS5906 Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
178 pages
PNB Recruiment 2024 For Various Posts
No ratings yet
PNB Recruiment 2024 For Various Posts
11 pages
Quadratic Equations Final
No ratings yet
Quadratic Equations Final
6 pages
BTS3900C WCDMA Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900C WCDMA Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
39 pages
CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive Networking
From Everand
CAN Bus for Beginners: A Practical Guide to Automotive Networking
Mohamad Charara
No ratings yet
Installation Guide For Cabinet Capacity Expansion (Draft) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
Installation Guide For Cabinet Capacity Expansion (Draft) (PDF) - EN
92 pages
3.1 Usage of Ajax and Json
No ratings yet
3.1 Usage of Ajax and Json
18 pages
DCA Vantage Brochure
No ratings yet
DCA Vantage Brochure
2 pages
APM30H Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
APM30H Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
36 pages
INS05 Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
INS05 Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN
64 pages
GRIHA Case Studies - ISA
No ratings yet
GRIHA Case Studies - ISA
4 pages
Data Quality Model
No ratings yet
Data Quality Model
107 pages
Id10122031 - 531158 01 - Edls GGLS Vas 129 0121
No ratings yet
Id10122031 - 531158 01 - Edls GGLS Vas 129 0121
1 page
AAU5631 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU5631 Hardware Description (01) (PDF) - EN
19 pages
BTS5900A Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS5900A Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
483 pages
Mastering Windows Automation with AHK 2.0
From Everand
Mastering Windows Automation with AHK 2.0
John Nunez
No ratings yet
XZB (36B) Rotating Cups-Installation Technique and Inspection Record
No ratings yet
XZB (36B) Rotating Cups-Installation Technique and Inspection Record
23 pages
AAU3940 Installation Guide (11) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
AAU3940 Installation Guide (11) (PDF) - EN
111 pages
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Installation Guide (12) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900L (Ver.D) Installation Guide (12) (PDF) - en
275 pages
Digital B&W Copiers (M156/M157/M176/M177-EU/AA) Parts Catalog
No ratings yet
Digital B&W Copiers (M156/M157/M176/M177-EU/AA) Parts Catalog
50 pages
AFM244-S23 Syllabus
No ratings yet
AFM244-S23 Syllabus
7 pages
Valet Parking Management System - Requirement Specification - V1
No ratings yet
Valet Parking Management System - Requirement Specification - V1
14 pages
BTS3900 GSM Installation Guide (V300 - 13)
No ratings yet
BTS3900 GSM Installation Guide (V300 - 13)
102 pages
DBS3900 Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (Ver.E Series) (05) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
DBS3900 Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (Ver.E Series) (05) (PDF) - en
1,504 pages
Innovating HRM in The Local Government - The Northern Samar Experience - BATULA, FLORENCIO A
No ratings yet
Innovating HRM in The Local Government - The Northern Samar Experience - BATULA, FLORENCIO A
1 page
BTS3900L Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (Ver.E Series) (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900L Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (Ver.E Series) (03) (PDF) - EN
341 pages
BTS3900A Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (Ver.F Series) (04) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900A Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (Ver.F Series) (04) (PDF) - en
1,118 pages
Meity - Approved Exemption Application Format-Revised
No ratings yet
Meity - Approved Exemption Application Format-Revised
8 pages
Engine Immobilizer System
No ratings yet
Engine Immobilizer System
6 pages
DBS3900 (BBU3910A) Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
DBS3900 (BBU3910A) Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
318 pages
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide (06) (PDF) - EN
277 pages
Arduino Energy Meter PDF
100% (2)
Arduino Energy Meter PDF
16 pages
PEAC Lesson Plan English 8
No ratings yet
PEAC Lesson Plan English 8
2 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
169 pages
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900L (Ver.B) Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - EN
155 pages
BBU5900A Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
100% (1)
BBU5900A Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - EN
151 pages
BTS3900C (Ver.C) Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900C (Ver.C) Installation Guide (03) (PDF) - EN
98 pages
Specifications For Connecting Rods in 3500 Family of Engines (0761, 0767, 1218)
100% (2)
Specifications For Connecting Rods in 3500 Family of Engines (0761, 0767, 1218)
19 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (07) (PDF) - EN
207 pages
Business Logic - Module 1
No ratings yet
Business Logic - Module 1
4 pages
Chapter 5 Conduction Shape Factor
No ratings yet
Chapter 5 Conduction Shape Factor
10 pages
GSM BTS3900A Onsite Engineer Operation Guide-20080730-IsSUE1 (1) .0
No ratings yet
GSM BTS3900A Onsite Engineer Operation Guide-20080730-IsSUE1 (1) .0
23 pages
3900 Series & 5900 Series Base Station Installation Guides-Wireless Network Info Community-Huawei Connect
100% (1)
3900 Series & 5900 Series Base Station Installation Guides-Wireless Network Info Community-Huawei Connect
7 pages
Block Diagram
No ratings yet
Block Diagram
6 pages
Series 315 Specification Sheet
No ratings yet
Series 315 Specification Sheet
1 page
NE40E-M2 - V800R021C10 - Installation Guide
No ratings yet
NE40E-M2 - V800R021C10 - Installation Guide
5 pages
Byt BZB 1 8 Tsfi Eng PDF
No ratings yet
Byt BZB 1 8 Tsfi Eng PDF
51 pages
Guide To Customer's Preparation For BTS3900 LTE Installation
No ratings yet
Guide To Customer's Preparation For BTS3900 LTE Installation
48 pages
MTS9000A V100R002C30 Telecom Power Installation Guide (MTS9514A-DM20E1, ...
No ratings yet
MTS9000A V100R002C30 Telecom Power Installation Guide (MTS9514A-DM20E1, ...
85 pages
Tai Lieu SmallCell BTS3911E Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
Tai Lieu SmallCell BTS3911E Installation Guide (04) (PDF) - en
98 pages
BTS3900A Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (06) (PDF) - en
100% (1)
BTS3900A Installation Guide For Enhancing Existing Cabinets (06) (PDF) - en
950 pages
BTS PDF
100% (1)
BTS PDF
339 pages
BBU5900A Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BBU5900A Installation Guide (01) (PDF) - en
135 pages
Guide To Customer's Preparation For BTS3900A WCDMA Installation-20080826-C-1.0
No ratings yet
Guide To Customer's Preparation For BTS3900A WCDMA Installation-20080826-C-1.0
42 pages
Installation Guide: BTS3900L (Ver.C)
No ratings yet
Installation Guide: BTS3900L (Ver.C)
119 pages
BTS3900A Site Maintenance Guide04PDF en
No ratings yet
BTS3900A Site Maintenance Guide04PDF en
132 pages
bts3900b Install r13c00 PDF
No ratings yet
bts3900b Install r13c00 PDF
20 pages
Procedure For Installing The BTS3812E
No ratings yet
Procedure For Installing The BTS3812E
2 pages
BTS3900 GSM Installation Guide (V300 - 13) PDF
100% (3)
BTS3900 GSM Installation Guide (V300 - 13) PDF
102 pages
Installation Guide 3812 Bts
No ratings yet
Installation Guide 3812 Bts
171 pages
BTS3801C Installation Guide
No ratings yet
BTS3801C Installation Guide
59 pages
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide (05) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide (05) (PDF) - en
246 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.D) Installation Guide (V100R009C00 - 03) (PDF) - en
175 pages
BTS3900A (Ver B) Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN PDF
No ratings yet
BTS3900A (Ver B) Installation Guide (02) (PDF) - EN PDF
176 pages
BTS3900L Ver C Hardware Description 07 PDF en
No ratings yet
BTS3900L Ver C Hardware Description 07 PDF en
227 pages
BTS3900 Hardware Description (V100R002 - 03)
100% (1)
BTS3900 Hardware Description (V100R002 - 03)
129 pages
BTS3900 GSM Hardware Description - (V300R008&009 - 03)
100% (1)
BTS3900 GSM Hardware Description - (V300R008&009 - 03)
143 pages
BTS3900AL
100% (1)
BTS3900AL
337 pages
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description (07) (PDF) - en
No ratings yet
BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description (07) (PDF) - en
276 pages
Wireless New LTE Site Installation SOP
No ratings yet
Wireless New LTE Site Installation SOP
126 pages
Bts3900 GSM Huawei
100% (5)
Bts3900 GSM Huawei
133 pages
Installation Guide To The BTS3900B GSM Outdoor Solution in PeruV0 5
100% (1)
Installation Guide To The BTS3900B GSM Outdoor Solution in PeruV0 5
25 pages
Bts3900b GSM User Guide - (v600r009 - 01)
No ratings yet
Bts3900b GSM User Guide - (v600r009 - 01)
30 pages
BTS3900A GSM Commissioning Guide - (V300R008 04)
100% (1)
BTS3900A GSM Commissioning Guide - (V300R008 04)
97 pages

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.